01 ETR300R Manual Control Ver1.47 201304

Release Date: Apr. 2013 / Manual Revision: 1.
47
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

USERS MANUAL
ENTEC
ENTEC
ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD
Copyright 2009 by ENTEC ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD all right reserved.
Forerunner Distribution & Automation
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Release Note:
[Apr. 2012] Ver1.40
Release note starts from version 1.40

[May. 2012] Ver1.41 Add CLPU-TYPE 2 Setup in 7.1.12.3. Cold Load Pickup Setup. [Aug. 2012] Ver1.42 Change the range and step of M.A.D(Deg) setting in GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK menu(in 6.4.1. Synchronism Check(25)). [Aug. 2012] Ver1.43 Changed the manual based on ETR300-R firmware Ver. 3.4 upgrading. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Change Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Protection in 2.4. Protection Elements. Change Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection in 2.4. Protection Elements. Change Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence High Current Lockout Protection in 2.4. Protection Elements. Change Live Load Blocking in 2.5. Monitoring. Change the description of Frequency setting in 6.1.1. Power Line. Change the description of Master IP Oct 1~4 settings in 6.2.1.1. DNP3 Protocol Setup. Change the step of DCD CheckOut setting in 6.2.2.1. PORT1(232) Setup. Change the range of TX PostDelay setting in 6.2.2.1. PORT1(232) Setup. Change the description of IP Address Oct 1~4, Gateway Oct 1~4 and Subnet Mask Oct 1~4 settings in 6.2.2.3. PORT3(EHTERNET) Setup. 10. Change the default of Wave Capture and Wave S/R settings in 6.3. Event Recorder. 11. Change the range of M.A.D(Deg) setting in SYNCHROCHECK menu. Change Synchronism in 2.5. Monitoring. Change the range of M.A.D(Deg) setting in 6.4.1. Synchronism Check(25). Change Power Quality Monitoring in 2.5. Monitoring. Change the default of Level setting in 6.4.5.2. Interrupt.
12. Change the default of Level setting in PQM / INTERRUPT menu.
13. Change the default and description of Level setting in 6.4.5.10. Under Frequency.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
14. Change the default and description of TD1-2 PU setting in 6.4.6. TD Monitor. 15. Change the default of DLV Max and LLV Min settings in 6.5. Loop Control. 16. Change the default of OUT101 setting in 6.7.2.2. Output Pulse Timer. 17. Change the range of Reclose 1 settings in INTERVALS menu. Change Reclose Control in 2.4. Protection Elements. Change the range of Reclose 1 settings in 7.1.1. Reclose(79). Change the default of Phase Pickup Current. Change the default and description of Curve.
18. Change 7.1.2. Phase (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrents (51P).
19. Change the default of Curve in 7.1.3. Ground (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrents (51G). 20. Change the default of Curve in 7.1.5. Negative Sequence (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrents (46). 21. Change the range and default of Time Delay in 7.1.9. Phase High Current Lockout(50P-2). 22. Change the range and default of Time Delay in 7.1.10. Ground High Current Lockout(50G-2). 23. Change the range and default of Time Delay in 7.1.11. Negative Sequence High Current Lockout(46(50)-2). 24. Change the settings in COLD LOAD PICKUP menu. Change Cold Load Pickup Blocking in 2.4. Protection Elements. Change the range of PHA(A) setting in 7.1.12.3. Cold Load Pickup Setup. Change the default of Outage Time setting in 7.1.12.3. Cold Load Pickup Setup. Change the range of RMT Time and Rst Time setting in 7.1.12.3. Cold Load Pickup Setup. 25. Change the default of Type setting in 7.1.13.1. Phase Directional Control(67P). 26. Change the default of Type setting in 7.1.13.2. Ground Directional Control(67G). 27. Change the range of Factor b setting in 7.1.18. Time Overcurrent Curves. 28. Change the default of Live Line Tm setting in 7.1.21. Live Line. 29. Change 7.1.22. Demand Current. Change the default of Function setting in DEMAND menu. Change the default and step of GND Pickup setting in DEMAND menu. Change the step of NEQ Pickup setting in DEMAND menu.
30. Change the default of L.O Priority setting in 7.1.23.2. Others. 31. Change the range of Time setting in 7.1.24. Phase Open/Loss. 32. Change the default of PHA-Pickup, GND-Pickup and NEG-Pickup settings in 7.1.25. Alarm Current. 33. Change 7.1.26. Loss of Phase. Change the range of Function setting in LOSS OF PHASE menu. Change the step of Pickup setting in LOSS OF PHASE menu.
ii
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
[Sep. 2012] Ver1.44 Changed the manual based on ETR300-R firmware Ver. 3.7 upgrading. 1. Change the location of AUTO SGRP CHANGE menu. Change Figure 5-14. Menu Structure Tree in 5.2.1. MENU STRUCTURE TREE. Change OTHERS in 5.2.2. GLOBAL Setting. Change 5.2.3. GROUP Setting. Add 6.8.5. Auto Setting Group Change.
2. Change 6.1.6. TIME ZONE. 3. Add Time Req(m) setting in 6.2.1.1. DNP3 Protocol Setup. 4. Add 6.2.1.2. IEC60870-5-101 Protocol Setup. 5. Add 6.2.1.3. IEC60870-5-104 Protocol Setup. 6. Change the default setting of BI Queue size, AI Queue size and CI Queue size setting in 6.2.4. Event & Etc Setup. [Dec. 2012] Ver1.45 1. Add the Note in TIME ZONE. 2. Change the description for AEvt Skip at Ft, Time Syn Type and Time Tag Type in 6.2.4. Event & Etc Setup. 3. Change Figure 7-34. Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18) in 7.1.18. Time Overcurrent Curves. [Dec. 2012] Ver1.46 1. Add the Side panel Port A(Option) in 2.7. Communications. 2. Add 4) PORT A(Option) in 4.2. Communication Port. 3. Add 4.11. External I/O Unit ETIO10(Option). 4. Change Setting Examples in 6.1.3. Voltage Sensing. 5. Changed the manual based on ETR300-R firmware V3.80 upgrading. Add Fault Locator in 2.5. Monitoring. Change Figure 5-14. Menu Structure Tree in 5.2.1. MENU STRUCTURE TREE. Add 2V INS-Type setting in 6.1.3. Voltage Sensing. Add 6.4.7. Fault Locator. Add 6.8.6. H/W Option. Change 8.3. Fault Cycle Summary. Change the NOTE in 6.7.2.1. Input Debounce Timer. Change the NOTE in 6.7.2.2. Output Pulse Timer. Change 11.2. Input Ports. Change 11.3. Output Ports.
6. Changed the manual based on ETR300-R firmware V4.00 upgrading.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
iii
[Apr. 2013] Ver1.47 Changed the manual based on ETR300-R firmware Ver. 3.9(standard type) and Ver. 4.1(external I/O option type) upgrading. 1. 2. 3. 4. Change the description of RX and TX lamps in 5.1.8. System Diagnostic Section. Add the setting items in 6.2.1.2. IEC60870-5-101 Protocol Setup. Add the setting items in 6.2.1.3. IEC60870-5-104 Protocol Setup. Add the setting item in 6.2.4. Event & Etc Setup.
iv
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................... 1
1.1. Description .......................................................................................................................... 1 1.2. Summary of Features .......................................................................................................... 2
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................. 6
2.1. Inputs and Outputs .............................................................................................................. 6 2.2. Type Withstand Tests ........................................................................................................... 8 2.3. Metering Accuracy .............................................................................................................. 9 2.4. Protection Elements........................................................................................................... 10 2.5. Monitoring......................................................................................................................... 15 2.6. Recorder ............................................................................................................................ 18 2.7. Communications................................................................................................................ 22
3. DIMENSIONS AND CONSTRUCTION .................................................................... 23 4. SIDE PANELCONSTRUCTION ..................................................................................... 24

4.1. Input and Output Terminal for SCADA ............................................................................ 24 4.2. Communication Port ......................................................................................................... 25 4.3. Current Input Terminal ...................................................................................................... 26 4.4. Voltage Input Terminal ...................................................................................................... 27 4.5. Monitor Terminal .............................................................................................................. 27 4.6. Trip & Close Terminal ....................................................................................................... 28 4.7. Outputs .............................................................................................................................. 28 4.8. Inputs ................................................................................................................................. 29 4.9. Power Input ....................................................................................................................... 29 4.10. Power Supply .................................................................................................................. 30 4.11. External I/O Unit ETIO10(Option) ................................................................................. 30
5. USER INTERFACE PANEL ........................................................................................ 32

5.1. Construction ...................................................................................................................... 33 5.2. LCD Display ..................................................................................................................... 42 5.3. Using the LCD Menu ........................................................................................................ 47
6. GLOBAL SETTING ..................................................................................................... 52
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.1. System ............................................................................................................................... 52 6.2. Communication ................................................................................................................. 62 6.3. Event Recorder .................................................................................................................. 92 6.4. Monitoring ......................................................................................................................... 93 6.5. Loop Control ................................................................................................................... 109 6.6. Passcode .......................................................................................................................... 128 6.7. PLC.................................................................................................................................. 129 6.8. Others .............................................................................................................................. 136
7. GROUP SETTING ...................................................................................................... 140

7.1. Protection(Primary, Alternate and Editebank Setup) .......................................................... 141 7.2. Select Setbank ................................................................................................................. 233
8. EVENT RECORDER ................................................................................................. 234

8.1. Operation Event ............................................................................................................... 234 8.2. Fault Event ...................................................................................................................... 235 8.3. Fault Cycle - Summary.................................................................................................... 237 8.4. System Event ................................................................................................................... 238 8.5. Set Change Event ............................................................................................................ 239 8.6. Aver. Load/Min ................................................................................................................ 240 8.7. Peak. Load/Hour .............................................................................................................. 241 8.8. Peak. Load/Day ............................................................................................................... 242 8.9. Diagnostic Event ............................................................................................................. 243 8.10. PQM .............................................................................................................................. 244 8.11. Alarm Current Event...................................................................................................... 246 8.12. Clear Saved Data ........................................................................................................... 247
9. MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................................ 248

9.1. Count ............................................................................................................................... 248 9.2. Interrupt Time .................................................................................................................. 255 9.3. Contact Wear ................................................................................................................... 255 9.4. DATA RESET.................................................................................................................. 256 9.5. CCU Information ............................................................................................................. 256
10. TIME .......................................................................................................................... 257 11. STATUS ...................................................................................................................... 258

11.1. Recloser ......................................................................................................................... 258 11.2. Input Ports ..................................................................................................................... 260
vi
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
11.3. Output Ports................................................................................................................... 261
12. METERING ............................................................................................................... 262

12.1. Metering Elements ........................................................................................................ 262
13. INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 270

13.1. User Interface Door and Power Switch ......................................................................... 270 13.2. Vent and Outer Cover .................................................................................................... 271 13.3. Dimensions and Mounting Plan .................................................................................... 272 13.4. Earth Wiring Diagram ................................................................................................... 274 13.5. Inner Structure ............................................................................................................... 275 13.6. Mount Accessories Dimensions .................................................................................... 276 13.7. User-Available DC Power ............................................................................................. 277 13.8. Terminal Block and Fuses ............................................................................................. 278 13.9. ETR300-R Wiring Diagram - CVD Type ...................................................................... 280 13.11. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram ................................................................................... 282 13.12. CVD Wiring Diagram ................................................................................................. 283 13.13. Current and Voltage Inputs Phase Rotation ................................................................. 284 13.14. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions ................................................................ 285 13.15. Control Cable Assembling / De-assembling ............................................................... 287 13.16. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions ...................................................................... 287 13.17. AC Power Cable .......................................................................................................... 288 13.18. Fuses ............................................................................................................................ 288 13.19. Battery and Control run time ....................................................................................... 289 13.20. Charge Circuit ............................................................................................................. 290 13.21. Battery Change ............................................................................................................ 290 13.22. Communication Cables ............................................................................................... 291 13.23. Hardware Block Diagram............................................................................................ 292 13.24. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits ................................................................................. 293 13.25. Uninterruptible Power Supply for Trip & Close ......................................................... 294 13.26. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram ................................................................................... 295 13.27. Recloser Current Transformer (CT) ............................................................................ 296 13.28. Recloser Capacitor Voltage Divider (CVD) ................................................................ 296 13.29. Recloser Pressure Sensor (Only EVR Type) ............................................................... 297 13.30. Recloser 52 contact and 69 contact ............................................................................. 299 13.31. Recloser Trip and Close Coil ...................................................................................... 299 13.32. Recloser Test Kit ......................................................................................................... 300
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
vii
14. MAINTANANCE ...................................................................................................... 301

14.1. Warning Events ............................................................................................................. 301 14.2. Malfunction Events ....................................................................................................... 303
15. PLC function.............................................................................................................. 304
viii
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. Description
ETR300-R with the microprocessor-based digital control technology is designed to provide protective coordination and fault clearance of distribution systems for the continuous best quality of electric service. Remote monitoring and control can be provided by RTU(Remote Terminal Unit - Option) which fundamentally installed. ETR300-R provides protection, control, and monitoring functions with both local and remote. It also displays the present trip/alarm conditions, and measured system parameters. Recording of past trip, alarm or control events, maximum demand levels, and energy metering is also performed. Users can operate Close and Trip, and also control ETR300-R with key buttons on the user interface panel; Protection Enabled, Ground Enabled, SEF Enabled, Reclose Enabled, Control Locked, Remote enabled, Alternate-settings, Loop control Enabled, Loop control auto restore, Hot line tag. Users can manage the Recloser interface software using a portable PC for modification of settings, acquisition of event data, and management of operation history. ETR300-R contains many T-C characteristic curves developed by IEEE C37.112, IEC255-3, McGraw Edison, and KEPCO to provide fully protective coordination for the continuous best quality of electric distribution. Users can select any time of current curve simply by programming and modifying.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
1.2. Summary of Features

PROTECTION
Two Phase Time Over-current Elements Phase High Current Trip Elements Phase Definite Time High Current Lockout Element Two Ground Time Over-current Elements Ground High Current Trip Elements Ground Definite Time High Current Lockout Element Sensitive Earth Fault Elements Two Negative Time Over-current Elements Negative High Current Trip Elements Negative Definite Time High Current Lockout Element Automatic Reclosing(Up To 5 Shots) Cold Load Pickup with Voltage Control Phase Directional Control Ground Directional Control Directional Sensitive Earth Fault Negative Sequence Directional Control Sequence Coordination Control Two Under-voltage Elements Two Over-voltage Elements Under-frequency Element Over-frequency Element Hotline Tag Element Loop Control
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
EVENT RECORDER
Restart and Diagnostic counter Trip and fault counter PQM counter Communication counter Interrupt Time S/W Operation recorder - last 256 events Fault event recorder - last 256 events Fault Waveform(20 cycles 32EA) - last 32 events System event recorder - last 2048 events Setting change event recorder - last 100 events Load profile recorder - last 6144 days Diagnostic event recorder - last 512 events PQM detection event recorder - last 512 events Alarm Current detection event recorder - last 512 events
MONITORING
Alarm Current Demand trip and alarm(Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, I2) Phase Open trip and alarm Live Line Trip Counter Limit Synchronism Check Live Load Block Recloser main contact Wear(Per Phase) Breaker Failure with Current Supervision Power Quality Monitoring(PQM) Interrupt Sag Swell Harmonics Current Unbalance Voltage Unbalance Under Voltage Over Voltage Under Frequency
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

Battery Automatic Load Test Recloser Operation Failure Voltage Transformer Failure TD Monitor Fault Locator(This function is supported from Ver. 3.80 of ETR300-R.) Recloser Gas Over and Low pressure NOTE : According to a recloser type, there may be no gas pressure monitoring.
METERING
Each phase current and angle (Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Isef) Each phase pick current (Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Iq) Each phase line to line voltage and angle (Va, Vb, Vc, Vr, Vs, Vt, Vab, Vbc, Vca, Vrs, Vst, Vtr) Current and voltage symmetrical component(I1, I2, 3I0, V1, V2, 3V0) Source and Load side frequency Single phase and Three phase power(kW, kVar, kVA, PF) Energy(10kWh, 10kVarh) Single phase and Three phase present demand and max. demand(Ia, Ib, Ic, In, I2, kW, kVar) Source/Load voltage and current unbalance Voltage and current harmonics Voltage and current True R.M.S ETR300-R internal temperature Tranducers input (TD1~5)
COMMUNICATIONS
Side panel PORT 1 RS232 Serial Port : DNP 3.0, Modbus and IEC60870-5-101 Protocol Side panel PORT 2 RS485 Serial Port : DNP 3.0, Modbus and IEC60870-5-101 Protocol Side panel PORT 3 RJ45 Port : DNP 3.0 and IEC60870-5-104 Protocol Side panel PORT A RJ45 Port(Option) : I/O expendable communication Front Panel PORT F RS232 Serial Port : ETR300-R interface software
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
USER INTERFACE
Fault indicators Manual Battery Load Test: Battery Voltage and Charge Voltage Dual Functional keypads 204 Character LCD Display 42 LED indicators - Fault indications, sequence status, battery status, etc RS232 port Setting Range Help Messages Access Security(2 passwords, security and related to communication)
AUXILIARY OUTPUTS
4 Opto-isolated Programmable Outputs
AUXILIARY INPUTS
4 Opto-isolated Programmable Inputs
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.1. Inputs and Outputs
Systems
3phase-3wire or 3phase-4wire, 38 maximum, 800 Amp maximum
Frequency
50 / 60 system and ABC/ACB phase rotation
Control Voltage Input

AC Voltage Input 110V/220Vac or other voltage (+10%,-15%) Nominal Battery Voltage : 24Vdc
User available DC power Output - Option

DC Power Voltage : 12, 15, 24Vdc DC Power Continuous : 30W DC Power for 10Sec : 70W
Voltage Transformer Inputs (VT) - Standard

Voltage Inputs V11, V12, V13, V21, V22, V23 and V10 Input Voltage Range : Phase-Neutral Continuous <6V Burden: 0.002VA(4V)
Voltage Transformer Inputs (VT) - Option

Voltage Inputs V11, V12, V13, V21, V22, V23 and V10 Input Voltage Range : Phase-Neutral Continuous <300V Burden: 0.6VA(300V), 0.2VA(220V), 0.05VA(120V), 0.02VA(67V)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Current Transformer Inputs (CT)

Current Inputs I01, I02, I03, IN and Ise I01, I02, I03, IN Input Current Range 1A Nominal 2A continuous 25A 1 second Burden : 0.38VA(1A) SEF Input Current Range 0.05A Nominal 0.16A Continuous 0.6A 1 second Burden : 0.0375VA(0.05A)
Control Inputs - Option

Control Inputs 4 Channel Nominal Voltages and Operating Range 250Vdc(-15%,+20%) 125Vdc(-15%,+20%) 48Vdc(-15%,+20%) 24Vdc(-15%,+20%) 12Vdc(-10%,+30%) Operating current : < 5mA at Nominal Voltages
Control Output Contacts - Option

Control Outputs 4 Channel 300Vac / 350Vdc Varistor for differential surge protection Operate / Release time : < 5ms at +20(+68) Maximum operating power
Table 2-1. Control Output Contacts (L/R=7ms) (cos=0.4) 125Vdc 48Vdc 24Vdc 250Vac 125Vac 0.1A 0.8A 3A 3A 5A
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
2.2. Type Withstand Tests

Dielectric Strength
CT inputs, VT inputs, Control Power inputs, Opto-isolated inputs and Relay outputs 2(60) for 1 minute
Impulse Voltage
IEEE C62.45 (1992) Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to Radiated Electromagnetic Interference Transceivers, 6(1.250), 3(820)
Surge Withstand Capability

IEEE C37.90.1 - 1989 IEEE SWC Tests for Protective Relays and Relay Systems (3 oscillatory 1 to 1.5, 5 fast transient 1.250) IEEE C37.90.2 - 1987 IEEE Trial-Use Standard, Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to Radiated Electromagnetic Interference from Transceivers, 10 V/m (150 and 450, 5 W transmitter 10)
Vibration Test
IEC 255-21-1 - 1988 Electrical relays, Part 21 : Vibration, shock, bump, and seismic tests on measuring relays and protection equipment, Section One - Vibration tests (sinusoidal), Class 1 Control Operating Temperature Operating range : -25+70(-13+158) LCD : -20+70(-4+158) - standard VFD : -40+85(-40+185) - option(Vacuum Fluorescent Display)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
2.3. Metering Accuracy

The quantity of electricity used in metering and protection is based on fundamental content which harmonic is removed in input voltage and current parameters.
Voltage metering
Rated voltage : AC effective value voltage 4 V Phase A, B, C : 0.5%( 80 120 % of rated voltage), 0.5 Zero sequence voltage(Vo) : 0.5 %( 80 120% of rated voltage), 0.5 V1, V2, 3V0 : 0.6 %( 80 120% of rated voltage), 1
Current metering
Rated current : AC 0.6 Arms IA, IB, IC, IG : 0.5 mA 0.5 % of reading(0.03~1.5 A), 0.5 IN : 0.005 mA + 0.5 % of reading(0.5~16.0 mA), 1 I1, I2, 3I0 : 0.01 A 3 % of reading(0.003~1.5A ), 1
Power metering
Apparent Power : 1.2 %( Rated Voltage >80 %, Rated Current >0.03) Active Power : 0.7 % PF=1, 1% PF>0.87(Rated Voltage >80%, Rated Current >0.03) Reactive Power : 0.7 % PF=0, 1% PF<0.5(Rated Voltage >80%, Rated Current >0.03)
Frequency metering
Source/Load Voltage Frequency : 0.02 Hz
Harmonic metering : 5%
The above measurement accuracy is applied only for ETR300R. The measurement accuracy of voltage and current after through ETR300R is about 1 %. However, the accuracy can be changed by the type of CT and PT of a recloser.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
2.4. Protection Elements

Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Protection
Phase/Ground/Negative Pickup Level....................... 10A ~ 1600A in steps of 1A *. The setting range of Pickup Level can vary according to H/W option. Dropout Level ........................................................... 96 to 98% of Pickup Curve Type ANSI : Normally, Very, Extremely IEC : Normally, Very, Extremely EB : Normally, Very Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s Korean(Kepco) Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4 User programmable curves : USER-1, USER-2, USER-3, USER-4 McGraw-Edison : Non-Standard Curves 32 Time dial.................................................................... 0.05 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01 Time adder ................................................................. 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01s Minimum Response time........................................... 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01s Reset Type ................................................................. Instantaneous/Linear Low Set Definite Time .............................................. OFF, 1 ~ 600 in steps of 1s Pickup Level Accuracy .............................................. 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 5% of trip time or 20
Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection

Active Sequence ........................................................ OFF, 1~5 in steps of 1 Phase/Ground/Neg Pickup Level ............................. OFF, 10A ~ 20000A in steps of 1A Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01s Pickup Level Accuracy .............................................. 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... at 0 time delay (50 max) 5% of trip time or 20
10
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence High Current Lockout Protection

Active Sequence ........................................................ OFF, 1~5 in steps of 1 Phase/Ground/Neg Pickup Level ............................. OFF, 10A ~ 20000A in steps of 1A Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01s Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... at 0 time delay (50 max) 5% of trip time or 20
Sensitive Earth Definite Time Overcurrent Protection

Pickup Level.............................................................. OFF, 0.1 to 160.0A in steps of 0.1A Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup Time Delay ................................................................ 0.0 to 180.0 in steps of 0.1s Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... at 0 time delay (50 max) 5% of trip time or 20
Cold Load Pickup Blocking

Phase/Ground//SEF/ NEQ Function.OFF/ ON Phase/Ground/NEQ Pickup Level ............................. OFF, 10A to 20000A in steps of 1A SEF Pickup Level ...................................................... OFF, 0.1A to 2000.0A in steps of 0.1A Outage Time .............................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s Phase/Ground//SEF/ NEQ R.M.T Function..OFF/ ON Phase/Ground/SEF/NEQ Restore Minimum Time... 0.00 to 60.00 in steps of 0.01s(lower than Ver 3.4) 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s (Ver 3.4 or higher) Phase/Ground/SEF/NEQ Reset Time ....................... 0.00 to 60.00 in steps of 0.01s(lower than Ver 3.4) 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s (Ver 3.4 or higher) Phase/Ground//SEF/ NEQ CLPU apply Curve Type ANSI : Normally, Very, Extremely IEC : Normally, Very, Extremely EB : Normally, Very Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s Korean Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4 User programmable curves : USER-1, USER-2, USER-3, USER-4 McGraw-Edison : Non-Standard Curves 32 Phase/Ground//SEF/ NEQ CLPU Multiple..0.05 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
11
Phase/Ground//SEF/ NEQ CLPU Adder Time.0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01sec) Phase/Ground//SEF/ NEQ CLPU M.R.T .................. 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01sec Make Use I.NO/YES Multiple of Cold Load..0(OFF), 1.0 to 5.0 in steps of 0.1 Cold Load Time ......................................................... 1 to 720 min in steps 1 min Pickup Level Accuracy .............................................. 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... at 0 time delay (50 max) 5% of trip time or 20
Phase Directional Control

Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Positive Sequence Voltage V1 Detecting Direction .................................................... NONE/FORWARD/REVERSE Maximum Torque Angle............................................ 0 to 359 in steps of 1 Minimum Polarizing Voltage ................................... OFF, 0.10 to 0.80 in steps of 0.01 xVT Block OC .................................................................. NO/ YES Angle Accuracy ......................................................... 2 Internal Operation Delay ........................................... 1.5cycle
Ground/Sensitive Earth Directional Control

Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Zero Sequence Voltage (V0) For voltage element polarizing the source VTs must be connected in Wye Detecting Direction .................................................... NONE/FORWARD/REVERSE Maximum Torque Angle............................................ 0 to 359 in steps of 1 Minimum Polarizing Voltage ................................... OFF, 0.10 to 0.80 in steps of 0.01 xVT Block OC .................................................................. NO/ YES Angle Accuracy ......................................................... 2 Internal Operation Delay ........................................... 1.5cycle
Negative Directional Control

Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Negative Sequence Voltage(-V2) Detecting Direction .................................................... NONE/FORWARD/REVERSE Maximum Torque Angle............................................ 0 to 359 in steps of 1 Minimum Polarizing Voltage ................................... OFF, 0.10 to 0.80 in steps of 0.01 xVT Block OC .................................................................. NO/ YES Angle Accuracy ......................................................... 2 Internal Operation Delay ........................................... 1.5cycle
12
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Under/Over Voltage 1/2 Protection

Function..................................................................... OFF/TRIP/ALARM/TRIP&ALARM Pickup Level.............................................................. 0.10 to 1.40 in steps of 0.01 pu Minimum Voltage ...................................................... 0.10 to 1.40 in steps of 0.01 pu Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup when over voltage 102 to 105% of Pickup when under voltage Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s Active Phases ............................................................ Any One/Any Two/All Three Normal Voltage Close ............................................... OFF/ON Close Wait Time ........................................................ 0 to 60000 in steps of 1s Close Wait Reset Time .............................................. 0 to 60000 in steps of 1s Min. Normal Voltage ................................................. 0.10 to 1.40 in steps of 0.01 pu Max. Normal Voltage ................................................ 0.10 to 1.40 in steps of 0.01 pu Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 20
Under/Over Frequency
Pickup Level.............................................................. OFF, 40.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01 Dropout Level ........................................................... at VT Pickup + 0.02 when under frequency at CVD Pickup+0.05 when under frequency at VT Pickup - 0.02 when over frequency at CVD Pickup -0.05 when over frequency Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s (definite time) Minimum Voltage ...................................................... 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 pu Minimum Current.................................................... OFF, 1 to 630 in steps of 1A Normal Frequency Close........................................... OFF/ON Close Wait Time ........................................................ 0 to 60000 in steps of 1s Close Wait Reset Time .............................................. 0 to 60000 in steps of 1s Min. Normal Voltage ................................................. 40.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01Hz Max. Normal Voltage ................................................ 40.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01Hz Level Accuracy.......................................................... at VT 0.02, at CVD 0.05 Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 2cycle
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13
Reclose Control
Operations to Lockout - phase trip ............................ 1 to 5 in steps of 1 Operations to Lockout - ground trip .......................... 1 to 5 in steps of 1 Operations to Lockout - SEF trip .............................. 1 to 5 in steps of 1 Operations to Lockout - Negative Seq trip ............... 1 to 5 in steps of 1 Operations of Fast curve - phase trip ......................... 0 to 5 in steps of 1 Operations of Fast curve - ground trip ...................... 0 to 5 in steps of 1 Operations of Fast curve - Negative Seq trip ........... 0 to 5 in steps of 1 Reclose interval 1 ...................................................... 0.5 to 600.0 in steps of 0.1(lower than Ver 3.4) 0.1 to 600.0 in steps of 0.1(Ver 3.4 or higher) Reclose interval 2 ...................................................... 1 to 1800 in steps of 1 Reclose interval 3 ...................................................... 1 to 1800 in steps of 1 Reclose interval 4 ...................................................... 1 to1800 in steps of 1 Reset time for Auto Reclose Cycle............................ 3 to 180 in steps of 1 Reset time from lockout ............................................ 1.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 C/P Wait Time ........................................................... 1.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 5%
Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Hot Line Tag

Curve Type ANSI : Moderately, Very, Extremely IEC : Normally, Very, Extremely EB : Normally, Very Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s Korean(Kepco) Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4 User programmable curves : USER-1, USER-2, USER-3, USER-4 McGraw-Edison : Non-Standard Curves 32 Time dial.................................................................... 0.05 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01 Time adder ................................................................. 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01s Minimum Response time........................................... 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01s Reset Type ................................................................. Instantaneous/Linear Pickup Level Accuracy .............................................. 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 5% of trip time or 20
Sequence Coordination Control

Sequence Coordination.............................................. On/ Off
14
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Lockout Priority
Lockout Priority ........................................................ Phase/ Ground
F.I Reset Method

Reset Method ............................................................ Auto/ Manual
Time Delay for Manual Close

Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s
2.5. Monitoring
Synchronism Check
Dead Voltage Maximum ............................................ 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 pu Live Voltage Minimum ............................................. 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 pu Maximum Voltage Difference ................................... 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 pu Maximum Angle Difference..................................... 0(OFF), 5 to 80 in steps of 1(lower than Ver 3.4) 1 to 100 in steps of 1(Ver 3.4 or higher) Maximum Frequency Difference .............................. 0.00 to 5.00 in steps of 0.01Hz Detect Phase .............................................................. ALL/ R(AB)/ S(CB)/ T Delay Time ................................................................ 0.0 to 180.0 in steps 0.1s
Operation Counter
Number of Pickup Limit ........................................... 1 to 20000 in steps of 1 Operation Counter Set ............................................... 0 to 10000 in steps of 1
Recloser Wear
Pickup Wear .............................................................. 0 to 100% in steps of 0.1 Rate System ............................................................... 15, 27, 38 Rate Interrupt() ...................................................... 5.0 to 50.0 in steps of 0.1 Number of Maximum Interruption ............................ 1 to 999 in steps of 1 Set Phase A Wear ....................................................... 0.0 to 100.0 % in steps of 0.1 Set Phase B Wear ...................................................... 0.0 to 100.0 % in steps of 0.1 Set Phase C Wear ...................................................... 0.0 to 100.0 % in steps of 0.1
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
15
Battery Automatic Load Test

Test Period ................................................................. 0(OFF), 1 to 720 hours in steps of 1hour
Power Quality Monitoring(PQM)

Interrupt Pickup Level ............................................... 0(OFF), 0.10 to 0.49pu in steps of 0.01pu Interrupt Delay Time ................................................. 0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5 cycle Sag Pickup Level ....................................................... 0(OFF), 0.50 to 0.99pu in steps of 0.01pu Sag Delay Time ......................................................... 0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5 cycle Swell Pickup Level.................................................... 0(OFF), 1.01 to 1.50pu in steps of 0.01pu Swell Delay Time ...................................................... 0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5cycle Voltage Total Harmonics Pickup Level ..................... 0(OFF), 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1% Voltage Total Harmonics Delay Time ....................... 0.2 to 60.0sec in steps of 0.1sec Current Total Harmonics Pickup Level ..................... 0(OFF), 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1% Current Total Harmonics Delay Time ....................... 0.2 to 60.0sec in steps of 0.1sec Voltage Unbalance Pickup Level............................... 0(OFF), 0.30 to 0.95pu in steps of 0.01pu Voltage Unbalance Delay Time ................................. 0.1 to 60.0sec in steps of 0.1sec Current Unbalance Pickup Level .............................. 0(OFF), 1 to 100% in steps of 1% Current Unbalance Delay Time ................................. 0.1 to 60.0sec in steps of 0.1sec Under Voltage Pickup Level ...................................... 0(OFF), 0.30 to 0.95pu in steps of 0.01pu Under Voltage Delay Time ........................................ 0.0 to 180.0sec in steps of 0.1sec Over Voltage Pickup Level ........................................ 0(OFF), 1.05 to 1.50pu in steps of 0.01pu Over Voltage Delay Time .......................................... 0.0 to 180.0sec in steps of 0.1sec Under Frequency Pickup Level ................................. 0(OFF), 46.00 to 59.98Hz in steps of 0.01Hz Under Frequency Delay Time ................................... 0.03 to 10.00sec in steps of 0.01sec Current Unbalance/THD Detect Limit Current ......... 0 to 630A in steps of 1A
TD Monitor
TD1 Rate ................................................................... 1 to 200 in steps of 1 TD1 Ratio .................................................................. 1 to 3000 in steps of 1 TD1 Offset................................................................. -10000 to +10000 in steps of 1 TD1-1 Type ............................................................... Under or Over TD1-1 PU ................................................................. 0(OFF), 0.1 to 6000.0 in step of 0.1 TD1-1 Delay ............................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 in step of 0.01sec TD1-2 Type ............................................................... Under or Over TD1-2 PU ................................................................. 0(OFF), 0.1 to 6000.0 in step of 0.1 TD1-2 Delay ............................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 in step of 0.01sec . NOTE : There is 4 more channels(TD2 ~ TD5) the same as above.
16
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Live Load Blocking

Function..................................................................... OFF/RECLOSING/CLOSE/BOTH Detect Level .............................................................. 0.10 to 0.90 pu in steps of 0.01 pu Detect Time ............................................................... 0 to 60000ms in steps of 5ms Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 20
Live Line
Detect Level .............................................................. 0.10 to 0.90 pu in steps of 0.01 pu Detect Time ............................................................... 0.0 to 180.0s in steps of 0.1s Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 20
Demand
Measured Values ....................................................... Phase A/B/C/G and NEQ Current(A) Phase A/B/C/G and NEQ Max. Current(A) Phase A/B/C/G 3 Real Power(kW) Phase A/B/C/G 3 Max. Real Power(kW) Phase A/B/C/G 3 Reactive Power(kvar) Phase A/B/C/G 3 Max. Reactive Power(kvar) Measurement Type .................................................... Thermal Exponential/Rolling Demand Time Constant ........................................................... 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 or 60 min. Phase/Ground/NEQ Pickup Level ............................. OFF, 10A ~ 1600A in steps of 1A Phase/Ground/NEQ Time Delay ............................... 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s Level Accuracy.......................................................... 5%
Phase Loss Detect

On Level .................................................................... 70 ~ 85% of phase voltage (in steps of: 1%) Off Level ................................................................... 30 ~ 75% of phase voltage (in steps of: 1%) Delay Time ................................................................ 0.0 to 180.0 in steps 0.1s
Alarm Current
Phase/Ground/NEQ Pickup Level ............................. OFF, 10A ~ 1600A in steps of 1A Phase/Ground/NEQ Time Delay ............................... 0.0 to 180.0 in steps 0.1s Level Accuracy.......................................................... 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 20
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
17
Fault Locator
Total Length of Feeder .............................................. 0.1 to 99.9 of 0.1km Real impedance of the feeder positive seq. ............... 0.1 to 6000.0 of 0.1ohms Imaginary impedance of the feeder positive seq. ...... 0.1 to 6000.0 of 0.1ohms Real impedance of the feeder zero seq. ..................... 0.1 to 6000.0 of 0.1ohms Imaginary impedance of the feeder zero seq ............. 0.1 to 6000.0 of 0.1ohms NOTE : Fault Locator function is supported from Ver. 3.80 of ETR300-R.
2.6. Recorder
OPERATION EVENT RECORDER
Trigger Source Recloser Closed(Manual/Remote CLOSE) Recloser Opened(Manual/Remote OPEN) Storage Capacity : Total 256 Events
FAULT EVENT RECORDER

Trigger Source Protection pickup Elements Trip command active Data Channels 5 currents(A, B, C, G, SEF) Storage capacity : 256 events
FAULT WAVEFORM CAPTURE

Trigger Source Protection pickup Elements Trip command active Data Channels 5 currents(A, B, C, G, SEF), 3 voltages(A, B, C), 32 logic input states, 16ch output relays, 16ch Input Sample Rate : 16/32/64/128 per cycle Trigger Position : 1 to 5cycle(128 sampling base and depending on the sample rate, it changes) Storage capacity : 32 events with max 160cycles(Cycle is dependent on sample rate)
18
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
SYSTEM EVENT RECORDER

Trigger Source Protection Elements 52A Contact Sequence status Front panel control AC supply External control Fail operation External input status System alarm Trigger Time : each 1/4 cycle Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout Storage Capacity : Last 2048 Events
SET CHANGE EVENT RECORDER

Trigger Source Global Setting Change Primary Group Setting Change Primary Group Setting Change Storage Capacity : Total 100 Events
LOAD PROFILE 1) Average Load/ Minute

Trigger Source Demand Current(A, B, C, G) Demand Real Power(A, B, C, 3) Demand Reactive Power(A, B, C, 3) Trigger Time : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20 or 30 minute Storage Capacity : Total 6144 Events Trigger Source Demand Current(A, B, C, G) Demand Real Power(A, B, C, 3) Demand Reactive Power(A, B, C, 3)
2) Peak Load/ Hour
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
19
Trigger Time : every 1 hour Storage Capacity : Total 6144 Events, 256days
3) Peak Load/ Day

Trigger Source Demand Current(A, B, C, G) Demand Real Power(A, B, C, 3) Demand Reactive Power(A, B, C, 3) Trigger Time : every 1 day Storage Capacity : Total 6144 Events, 6144 days
DIAGNOSTIC EVENT RECORDER

Trigger Source System Power(AC, Battery, 12V, +5V) A/D Conversion(A/D Fail, Reference Voltage1, Reference Voltage 2) Power Down Mode Gas Status Setting Change(Global Setting, Primary Setting, Alternate Setting) DSP Fail RTC Fail Memory Fail Flash-Rom Fail Circuit Voltage Fail Event Fail Count Fail DO Fail Close Fail Open Fail Trigger Time : each 1/4 cycle Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout Storage Capacity : Last 512 Events
PQM EVENT RECORDER

Trigger Source PQM pickup Elements Storage Capacity : Total 512 Events Trigger Time : each 5 msec
20
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
ALARM CURRENT EVENT RECORDER

Trigger Source Phase A, B, C, N Alarm current Trigger Time : each 1/4 cycle Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout Storage Capacity : Last 512 Events
COUNTER
System Restart : 0 to 65534 Diagnostic: 0 to 65534 Operation : 0 to 65534 Fault : 0 to 65534 PQM : 0 to 65534 Interrupt Time : 0 to 65534 cycle Communication : 0 to 65534
RECLOSER WEAR
Phase A Wear : 0.0 to 100.0% Phase B Wear : 0.0 to 100.0% Phase C Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
21
2.7. Communications
Table 2-2. Communications RS232, 1200-19200bps, None, Odd or Even Parity, 7 or 8 Side panel Port 1 Data bits, 1 or 2 Stop bit DNP 3.0, Modbus and IEC60870-5-101 Protocol RS485/422, 1200-19200bps, None, Odd or Even Parity, 7 or 8 Side panel Port 2 Data bits, 1 or 2 Stop bit DNP 3.0, Modbus and IEC60870-5-101 Protocol Side panel Port 3 Side panel Port A(*Option) Front Panel Port F RJ-45, 10BASE-T/100BASE-T DNP 3.0, Modbus and IEC60870-5-104 Protocol RJ-45, RS-422 communication method used I/O expendable communication port RS232, 1200-57600bps, No Parity, 8 Data Bits, 1 Stop bit ETR300-R interface software
22
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
3. DIMENSIONS AND CONSTRUCTION
10M/100M
PORT3
Control & Communication Unit
RJ45 XPORT
-R02
RUN DIAG/ERROR RX / TX AC SUPPLY CHARGER
LINK
K04
POWER IN
K03
1:DCD 2:RXD 3:TXD 4:DTR 5:GND 6:DSR 7:RTS 8:CTS 9:N/C
K02
PORT1
G08
K01
G06
G07
G05
BATTERY
2TX 2RX 1TX 1RX
V23
V0
5559 1
485+ 485- SG
G04
CN1
REVERSE POWER CLPU ON METER FUN 79 RESET 79 CYCLE EVENT SET ESC 79 LOCKOUT
POWER SUPPLY
PORT2
V22
G03
950
J01 J02 J03 J04
G02
V21
G01
950
F06
51 FAST/DELAY AWAKE 50 INSTANTANEOUS

Antenna
F05
V13
5559 1
PORT RF
F04
ENT
F03
F02
LAMP TEST
TX RX
5559 1
V11
CN3
B FAULT BATT' CHECK TRIP TEST FI RESET C FAULT
F01
Antenna
A Phase Unbalance
E10
H01 H02 H03 H04 H05 H06
PROTECTION ENABLED
REMOTE ENABLED
RCV
SEF
GPS
GROUND
3
950
5559 5559 1 5559 1 5559 1
1
1:IN204 4:IN205 2,5:+12V 3,6:GND
A FAULT
INPUTS
2 2 1
1:DC02 3:DC03 2,4:COM
50 HIGH CURRENT
V12
CN2
1
1:IN203 2:IN202 3:IN201 4:+12V
2 N P 2 1
1:+12V 2:DC01 3,4:GND
1
1,3:P 2,4:N
B Phase Unbalance GROUND ENABLED ALTERNATE SETTINGS C Phase Unbalance ABC / RST LIVE
A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08
E09
OUTPUTS
Ise
E08
IN103
E06
ENABLED
ENABLED
VB / VS VC / VT
I03
TRIP & CLOSE
CN4
IN102
RECLOSE ENABLED AUTO RESTORE
E05
E04
IN101
950-08
E03
I02
N.C
E02
CN5
CONTROL LOCKED
HOT LINE TAG
I01
OUT104
E01
OUT103
MONITORS
CN6
CLOSE
OPEN
PORT F
OUT102
OUT101
950-10
CN7
Figure 3-1. Construction and Dimensions(Standard)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
1
1,3:DC(+) 2,4:DC(-)
1
1,5:N/C 2,6:OUT202 3,7:OUT204 4,8:COM
1
SEF
E07
VA / VR
IN104
IN
OUT205
OUT206
0 0 3 R T E
AC 24V
AC 24V
-BAT
+BAT
1 L 2 L 3 L 4 L
23
4. SIDE PANEL CONSTRUCTION

ETR300-R Side panel construction is as follows.
TX
950-10 950-08
2TX 2RX
1
10M/100M
LINK
950
RX RCV Antenna Antenna 485+ 485- SG
RJ45 XPORT
9
+
OUT101 OUT102 OUT103 OUT104 N.C IN101
+
IN102
+
IN103
+
IN104
1TX 1RX
GPS
PORT RF
PORT2
1:DCD 2:RXD 3:TXD 4:DTR 5:GND 6:DSR 7:RTS 8:CTS 9:N/C
PORT1
PORT3
E01
E02
E03
E04
E05
E06
E07
E08
E09
E10
F01
F02
F03
F04
F05
F06
G01
G02
G03
G04
G05
G06
G07
G08
I01
I02
I03
IN
Ise
V11
V12
V13
V21
V22
V23
V0
MONITORS
CN7 4 3 4 CN6 3 4 CN5
TRIP & CLOSE

CN4 3 8 5
OUTPUTS
CN3 H01 H02 H03 H04 H05 H06 6
INPUTS
CN2 4 4 3
POWER SUPPLY
CN1 J01 J02 J03 J04 4 3 K01
POWER IN
K02 K03 K04
5559 1 1
1 OUT205 OUT206
Figure 4-1. Side Panel(Standard) Cable standard for connector refers to Table 4-1. Cable rating for connector. Table 4-1. Cable standard for connector Item Current Power Supply Digital Input Digital Output Voltage Standard( ) 1.25(50/0.18) " 0.75(12/0.18) " " Length( ) 300 " " " " Model No. AkZ 960-10P AkZ 960-4P Molex 5557-6P,4P AkZ 950-6P AkZ 960-6P,8P Remark
4.1. Input and Output Terminal for SCADA

4 Input and 4 Output terminals for SCADA.
950-10
950-08
+
OUT101 OUT102 OUT103 OUT104 N.C IN101
+
IN102
+
IN103
Figure 4-2. INPUTS and OUTPUTS
24
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
5559
5559
5559
5559
5559
5559
950
950
1:DC02 3:DC03 2,4:COM
1:+12V 2:DC01 3,4:GND
2,4:DC(-)
1,3:DC(+)
2,4:N
1,3:P
4,8:COM
3,7:OUT204
2,6:OUT202
1,5:N/C
3,6:GND
2,5:+12V
4:IN205
1:IN204
1:IN203 2:IN202 3:IN201 4:+12V
+BAT
-BAT
AC 24V
AC 24V
+
IN104
4.2. Communication Port

1) PORT1(232) PORT1 has D-SUB 9pin as Male type and all pins are connected except pin number 9, RI(Ring Indicator). Table 4-2. PORT1 Pin Description
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signal DCD RXD TXD DTR GND DSR RTS CTS N/C Description Data Carrier Detect Receive Data(IN) Transmit Data(OUT) Data Terminal Ready(OUT) Ground Data Set Ready(IN) Request To Send(OUT) Clear To Send(IN) No Connection
1T 1R
9 1
1: DCD2: RXD 3: TXD 4: DTR 5: GND6: DSR 7: RTS 8: CTS 9: N/C
PORT1
Figure 4-3. PORT1
2) PORT2(485) PORT2 has 3pins as in Table 4-3. PORT2 Pin Description. Table 4-3. PORT2 Pin Description
Pin 1 2 3 Description RS485+ RS485SG (Cable Shield)
950
3
2T 2R
485+ 485- SG
PORT2
Figure 4-4. PORT2
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
25
3) PORT3(ETHERNET) PORT3 is RJ-45 that has 8pins as in Table 4-4. PORT3 Pin Description. Table 4-4. PORT3 Pin Description
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Wire Color White/Green Green White/Orange Blue White/Blue Orange White/Brown Brown 10Base-T Signal 100Base-TX Signal Transmit+ TransmitReceive+ Unused Unused ReceiveUnused Unused
PORT3
10M/100M LINK
RJ45 XPORT
Figure 4-5. PORT3
4) PORT A(Option) PORT A is RJ-45 and is used for communication

A TX
with External I/O Unit ETIO10. For detailed information on External I/O Unit ETIO10, refer to 4.11. External I/O Unit ETIO10.
RS422
A RX
PORT-A
Figure 4-6. PORT A(Option)
4.3. Current Input Terminal

Current connector starts from pin number 1(A phse), 2(B phase), 3(C phase), 4(N, ground), 5(SEF) in turn and each phase name is indicated at current input Input connector of ETR300. Connector type is STLZ960-10. Table 4-5. Current Input Pin Description
Pin Description IO1 IO2 IO3 IN Ise
A B C N SEF phase phase phase phase
Figure 4-7. Current Input Terminal
26
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
4.4. Voltage Input Terminal

Voltage connector receives source side 3 phases(A,B,C) voltages and load side 3 phases(R,S,T) voltages. Pin arrangement is as in Table 4-6. Voltage Input Pin Description. Connector type is STLZ960-6P and 8P. Table 4-6. Voltage Input Pin Description
Pin Default LCD Display V11 A V12 B V13 C V21 R V22 S V23 T V0 V0
Figure 4-8. Voltage Input Terminal
4.5. Monitor Terminal

It is input terminal to monitor ETR300 status and its pin arrangement is as in Table 4-7. Monitors Pin Description. Table 4-7. Monitors Pin Description Connector CN6 CN7 Pin DC01 DC02 DC03
Description
Gas Pressure, 10V Spare, 20mA Spare, 20mA
Figure 4-9. MoitersTerminal
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
27
4.6. Trip & Close Terminal

Output terminal to control ETR300 and its arrange is as in Table 4-8. TRIP & CLOSE Pin Description. Table 4-8. TRIP & CLOSE Pin Description Connector CN4 CN5 Pin OUT202 OUT204 DC TRIP POWER
Description
CLOSE
Figure 4-10. TRIP & CLOSE Terminal
4.7. Outputs
Digital Output(DO) terminal has total 2 relay output where sending a control signal, its pin arrangement is as follow.
Figure 4-11. Outputs
28
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
4.8. Inputs
5 inputs of status provision. Pin arrangement is as in Table 4-9. Digital Input Pin Description. Table 4-9. Digital Input Pin Description Connector Pin 01 02 03 01 CN3 04
Description
Connector
Pin 04 04 04 02, Figure 4-12. Digital Input Terminal
Open status Close status Manual Unlock Door open status Spare CN3
CN2
CN2
05 02, 05
4.9. Power Input

Power Input Terminal for ETR300s Power Supply . Pin Configuration is followed Table 4-10. Power Input Pin Description. Table 4-10. Power Input Pin Description Pin K01 K02 K03 K04
Description
Battery + Terminal Battery Terminal AC 24V Input terminal AC 24V Input terminal
Figure 4-13. Power Input Terminal
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
29
4.10. Power Supply

Input and Output Terminal for Modem Power.
CN1 Connector P : DC 24V + (rectified voltage) N : GND
J Connector Figure 4-14. Power Input Terminal P : DC 24V + N : GND
4.11. External I/O Unit ETIO10(Option)

By using the EXT Port, the number of input and output channels of ETR300-R is expanded. External I/O Unit ETIO10 is configured the following way. 1) COM Port RJ-45 ETR300-R Communication between side panel Port A and RS422 2) DC Power Input DC Power Voltage : 12, 24, 110Vdc DC Power Continuous : 4W Figure 4-15. External I/O Unit ETO10
3) Inputs Channels Input 12 Channels Nominal Voltages and Operating Range 250Vdc(-15%,+20%) 125Vdc(-15%,+20%) 48Vdc(-15%,+20%) 24Vdc(-15%,+20%) 12Vdc(-10%,+30%) Operating current : < 5mA at Nominal Voltages
30
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
4) Output Channels Output 8 Channels 300Vac / 350Vdc Varistor for differential surge protection Operate / Release time : < 5ms at +20(+68) Maximum operating power
Table 4-11. Output Channel Contacts (L/R=7ms) (cos=0.4) 125Vdc 48Vdc 24Vdc 250Vac 125Vac 0.1A 0.8A 3A 3A 5A
I/O UNIT
PORT1
POW RUN TX RX 8
DO
DI
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8
IN9IN10
IN11 IN12
12
RS422 OUT1 P N SG FG LAMP TEST
A01 02 03 04 05 06 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4
07 08 09 10 OUT5 OUT6
B01 02 03 04 05 06 OUT7 OUT8 ALARM
ETIO10
E01 02 03 04
C01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
D01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
ENTEC ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO,, LTD.
Figure 4-16. ETO10s Side Panel
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
31
5. USER INTERFACE PANEL

This section describes the User Interface Panel(front-panel) User Interface Panel uses LCD(20 4) and keypad to provide any function selection for monitoring and LEDs indicates selected function status and recloser operation status. The User interface Panel control is used for; Directly control the recloser Verify control status View system status View metering value View information stored in the ETR300-R unit View and change the ETR300-R settings
ETR300 -R02
RUN DIAG/ERROR RX / TX AC SUPPLY CHARGER BATTERY REVERSE POWER CLPU ON
METER
FUN 79 RESET 79 CYCLE
EVENT
SET
ESC
79 LOCKOUT 51 FAST/DELAY
AWAKE
ENT
50 INSTANTANEOUS 50 HIGH CURRENT A FAULT
LAMP TEST B FAULT BATT' CHECK TRIP TEST FI RESET C FAULT GROUND SEF PROTECTION ENABLED REMOTE ENABLED B Phase Unbalance GROUND ENABLED ALTERNATE SETTINGS C Phase Unbalance ABC / RST LIVE VA / VR SEF ENABLED ENABLED VB / VS VC / VT RECLOSE ENABLED AUTO RESTORE L1 L2 CONTROL LOCKED HOT LINE TAG L4 L3 A Phase Unbalance
CLOSE
OPEN
PORT F
Figure 5-1. User Interface Panel
32
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
5.1. Construction
Panel consists of 8 sections as below; Operation section Local control section Menu control section Other control section Fault indication section Voltage elements section Reclosing Sequence status section System diagnostic section Battery status section User LED section Other status section
5.1.1. Operation Section

OPEN Pressing OPEN push-button sends a trip signal to the Recloser. CLOSE Pressing CLOSE push-button sends a close signal to the Recloser. Units operating with firmware version 2.18 or later have a feature of Close Time Delay. The Close Time Delay allows a delay of 0.00 to 600.00 seconds after pressing the close push-button before closing the recloser. POSITION LED Indicates the position of the Recloser. Position indicator is based on the Recloser 52a contacts.
Figure 5-2. Operation Section
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
33
5.1.2. Local Control Section

All indicators show status of Control function. The indicators are continuously ON when the control function is enable and the indicators are continuously OFF when control function is DISABLE. The push-button toggles Enable/Disable PROTECTION ENABLED All Protection elements are enabled GROUND ENABLED Ground Protection elements are disabled SEF ENABLED SEF Protection elements are disabled RECLOSE ENABLED Reclose function is enabled CONTROL LOCKED Front panel function is unlocked REMOTE ENABLED Remote control is disabled ALTERNATE SETTINGS Alternate setting is disable Primary Setting is enable LOOP CONTROL ENABLED Loop control function is enabled LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE Auto restoration function of is enabled HOT LINE TAG Hot Line Tag function is disabled Protection Enabled When illuminated, all protection elements are enabled. The enabled protection condition can be disabled by pressing the Protection Enabled push button on the front panel. NOTE : If PROTECTION ENABLED is ON, all protection elements are operating, however, Ground Overcurrent Protection Element and Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Element are individually set for enable or disable on front panel by LED ON/OFF button. Figure 5-3. Local Control Section
34
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Ground Enabled LED is ON and OFF by pressing a button. PROTECTION ENABLED LED is ON and GROUND ENABLED LED is ON, Ground Overcurrent Protection element operates. However, Even if GROUND ENABLED is ON and PROTECTION ENABLED LED is OFF, Ground protection does not operate. If GROUND ENABLED is OFF, PROTECTION ENABLED is ON, ground protection does not operate. SEF Enabled LED is ON and OFF by pressing a button. PROTECTION ENABLED LED is ON and SEF ENABLED LED is ON, sensitive earth fault protection element operates. However, Even if SEF ENABLED is ON and PROTECTION ENABLED LED is OFF, sensitive earth fault protection does not operate. If SEF ENABLED is OFF, PROTECTION ENABLED is ON, sensitive earth fault protection does not operate. Reclose Enabled When Reclose Enable LED is on, the reclose(79) element is enabled. The enabled reclose element can be disabled by pressing the Recloser Enabled push-button on the front panel. Control Locked When Control Locked LED is on, all functions in operation section and all functions in Local control section are locked. These can be unlocked by pressing the Control Locked push-button on the front panel NOTE : Even though Control Locked function is locked, OPEN, Lamp Test, Battery Load Test and menu control section can be normally operated. Remote Enabled When Remote Enabled LED is on, all remote control functions (e.g. SCADA system) are enabled. This can be disabled by pressing the Remote Enabled push-button on the front panel. SCADA control refers to supported communications protocol such as DNP3.0 Alternate Enabled When Alternate Enabled LED is on, the Alternate setting is activated. When Alternate Enabled LED is off, the primary setting is activated. Activated group on display, is applied to GROUP Setting.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
35
Loop Control Enabled When Loop Control Enabled LED is on, loop control function is enabled. SEC, MID can be selected on CLOSE status and TIE can be selected on OPEN status. Loop Control Auto Restore When Loop Control Auto Restore LED is on, auto restoration function is enabled. Auto restoration function is, after loop control operation, Auto Ret T timer operates till timeout, and restores the preset values. Hot Line Tag When Hot Line Tag LED is on, the Hot Line Tag function is enabled.
5.1.3. Menu Control Section

ETR300-R has 20 4 LCD(Liquid Cristal Display) display. LCD DISPLAY 4x20 Characters display CONTROL KEYS [] [] [] [] Arrow keys are used for the moving between the menu window and the changing of the setting value [] (METER) : Up arrow key is used to move to the meter menu, operable in menu starting mode [] (AWAKE) : Down arrow key is used for panel awake from sleep mode [] (EVENT) : Left arrow key is used to move to the event menu, operable in menu starting mode [] (SET) : Right arrow key is used to move to the setting menu, operable in menu starting mode [FUN] : To move to main menu when present mode is in starting mode [ESC] : To cancel for data input mode or return the display to the previous level [ENT] : To select sub menu or data input
36
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Figure 5-4. Menu Control Section
[FUN] Key Press [FUN] key to enter Main menu for displaying information or changing settings. [FUN] key is also used to display a help message in setting change mode and to cancel the help message display. [ESC] Key The ESC key can be used to cancel data input mode and return to the previous menu. [ENT] Key ENT key is used to select a menu by using Up and Down arrow key. Enter key is also used to accept a new setting by using Up or down arrow key. [] [] Key Use the left and right arrow keys to move cursor when you are in the data input mode and when you change display message. [] [] Key Use Up and Down arrow keys to move through the various menus and to decrease or increase value when you are in the data input mode.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
37
5.1.4. Other Control Section

BATT CHECK Push-button for battery load test. Battery alarm setting, refer to TD menu. TRIP TEST Push-button for trip test. By pressing this butoon, fault simulation is activated like 1500A of fault current flow in phase A, B, C. Protection function is operated according to the user setting . FI RESET Reset fault indication/Lamp test
Figure 5-5. Menu Control Section
5.1.5. Fault Indication Section

On fault detection, protection elements and phase are displayed which detects more than overcurrent set level. Phase Time Over-current Elements Fast/Delay Phase High Current Trip Elements Phase Definite Time High Current Lockout Elements Ground Time Over-Current Elements Fast/Delay Ground High Current Trip Elements Ground Definite Time High Current Lockout Elements Sensitive Earth Time Over-Current Elements Negative Sequence Time Over-Current Elements Fast/Delay Negative Sequence High Current Trip Elements Negative Definite Time High Current Lockout Elements Phase, Ground, Sensitive Earth and Negative Directional Control Figure 5-6. Fault Indication Section
38
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
TRIP TYPE 51 FAST/DELAY : Shows delay trip 50 INSTANTANEOUS : Shows high current trip 50 HIGH CURRENT : Shows high current lockout
FAULT INDICATION A, B, C FAULT : Indicates an over-current fault has occurred on one of the phase lines GROUND : Indicates an over-current fault has occurred on the neutral line SEF : Indicates a sensitive earth fault has occurred on the neutral line
5.1.6. Voltage Elements Section

Indicates that voltage pickup element is operated. Two Under voltage Elements Two Over voltage Elements Synchronism Element Under frequency Element Hot Line Elements
A Phase Unbalance B Phase Unbalance C Phase Unbalance ABC / RST LIVE VA / VR VB / VS
A Phase Unbalance : A phase angle difference detected B Phase Unbalance: B phase angle difference detected C Phase Unbalance: C phase angle difference detected ABC/RST LIVE : Source and load side live line status VA/VR, VB/VS, VC/VT : Each phase Phase Open/Loss Status
VC / VT
Figure 5-7. Voltage Elements Section
5.1.7. Reclosing Sequence Status Section

Indicates the current status of programmed sequence procedure. 79 RESET : Sequence shows resetting 79 CYCLE : Sequence shows running 79 LOCKOUT : Sequence shows lockout Figure 5-8. Sequence Status Section
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
39
5.1.8. System Diagnostic Section

Indicates Diagnostic status of the ETR300-R. RUN LED(green) indicates the ETR300-R has successfully passed its internal diagnostic test. DIAG/ERROR LED(Red) indicates the ETR300-R has failed its internal diagnostic test. RX/TX LED(Red) shows Communication status of ETR300-R. RUN Status of ETR300-R systems shows normal DIAG/ERROR Status of ETR300-R systems shows warning RX Shows the data receiving status for remote communication. TX Shows the data transferring status for remote communication. NOTE : RUN LED is blinking when system functional status is normal Figure 5-9. System Diagnostic Section
5.1.9. Battery Status Section

Indicates the system power status of the ETR300-R. AC SUPPLY indicates the ETR300-R has external power source. CHARGER LED shows ETR300-R charging status, BATTERY LED shows ETR300-R battery status. AC SUPPLY Status of supplying the external AC power. CHARGER If Charger LED is On, charger is normal status. Charging voltage is always monitored, refer to TD menu for detail. BATTERY If Battery LED is On, battery is normal status. To check the battery, do battery load test and check LED status. Figure 5-10. Battery Status Section
40
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
5.1.10. User LED Section

Status of PLC logic which is set by a user is displayed. PLC logic is set in ETR300-R interface software. Factory default setting is as follows.
Figure 5-11. User LED Section Table 5-1. Default User LED Function LED No L1 L2 L3 L4 Name MLOCK GASLOW + GASHIGH DSPLINK CPULINK L3 becomes ON when dsp bord linked. L4 becomes ON when communication bord linked. Descrpition L1 becomes ON when handle is locked. L2 becomes ON when gas pressure is low or high.
5.1.11. Other Status Section

REVER POWER When reverse current flows, REVERSE POWER LED becomes On. Reverse power is determined by 3-phase power factor. Figure 5-12. Other Status Section CLPU ON In the Cold Load Duration, CLPU ON LED becomes On.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
41
5.2. LCD Display

20 4 character LCD which has back-light support, is used for a user to operate conveniently and to check operation status clearly.
Figure 5-13. Initial Logo and Main Menu
5.2.1. MENU STRUCTURE TREE

Screen structure consists Initial Logo and Main menu. Initial screen and all menu are round robin algorithm. Menu screen is divided in to Setting and Event management menu. Main menu has 7 sub-menus.
42
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
[MAIN MENU]
>1.GLOBAL SETTING
>1.SYSTEM
>1.POWER LINE 2.CURRENT SENSING 3.VOLTAGE SENSING 4.CB OPENING TIME 5.GAS SENSOR TYPE 6.TIME ZONE >1.PROTOCOL SETUP
>2.COMMUNICATION
>1.DNP3 S1 2.DNP3 S2 3.IEC870-5-101 4.IEC870-5-104 5.MODBUS
>2.PORT SETUP >3.DIALUP MODEM >3.EVENT RECORDER >4.EVENT&ETC SETUP 5.FTP FILE TRANSFER *.SAVE SETTING >4.MONITORING >1.SYNCHROCHECK 2.OPERATION COUNT 3.CONTACT WEAR 4.BATTERY TEST >5.PQM >5.LOOP CONTROL >6.TD MONITOR 7.FAULT LOCATOR >6.PASSCODE >1.PASSCODE1 2.PASSCODE2 >1.COMMON >2.DI/DO >1.TIME DISPTYPE 2.PANEL SLEEP TIME 3.Vo SELECT 4.FACTORY DEBUG 5.AUTO SGRP CHANGE 6.H/W OPTION >1.PRIMARY >1.PQM FUNCTION 2.INTERRUPT 3.SAG 4.SWELL 5.HARMONICS 6.CURR UNBALANCE 7.VOLT UNBALANCE 8.UNDER VOLTAGE 9.OVER VOLTAGE 10.UNDER FREQUENCY 11.ITHD/UBI I LIMIT >1.DIAL1
>1.PORT1(232) 2.PORT3(485) 3.PORT4(ETHERNET) 4.PORTF(232) >1.CALLING STRING 2.CALLING NUMBER 3.INITIAL STRING 4.CONNECTION
>7.PLC
>1.LOGIC TIMER 2.PULSE TIMER 3.PULSE COUNTER >1.INPUT DEBOUNCE 2.OUTPUT PULSE TIME
>8.OTHERS >*.SAVE SETTING
>1.OPERATION >2.INTERVALS >3.PICKUP CURRENT 4.PHASE FAST 5.PHASE DELAY 6.GROUND FAST 7.GROUND DELAY 8.SEF ELEMENT 9.NEG SEQ FUNC 10.NEG SEQ FAST 11.NEG SEQ DELAY 12.H/C TRIP-PHA 13.H/C TRIP-GND 14.H/C TRIP-NEG 15.H/C LOCKUOT-PHA 16.H/C LOCKUOT-GND 17.H/C LOCKUOT-NEG 18.COLD LOAD PICKUP >19.DIRECTION >1.PHASE/NEG SEQ 2.GROUND 3.SEF 4.OTHERS
>2.GROUP SETTING
>2.ALTERNATE
>3.EDITBANK
>1.PHASE 2.GROUND 3.SEF 4.NEG SEQ >1.UNDER/OVER VOLT 1 2.UNDER/OVER VOLT 2 >1.UNDER/OVER FREQ >1.USER 2.USER 3.USER 4.USER >1.PHASE 2.GROUND 3.SEF 4.NEG SEQ CURVE CURVE CURVE CURVE 1 2 3 4
>4.SELECT SETBANK >3.EVENT >1.OPERATION 2.FAULT 3.FAULT CYCLE 4.SYSTEM 5.SET CHANGE 6.AVER.LOAD/MIN 7.PEAK.LOAD/HOUR 8.PEAK.LOAD/DAY 9.DIGNOSTIC 10.PQM 11.ALARM CURRENT
>20.VOLTAGE >21.FREQUENCY >22.USER CURVE >23.LIVE LOAD BLOCK >24.HOTLINE TAG >25.LIVE LINE 26.DEMAND 27.OTHER ELEMENT 28.ON/OFF LEVEL 29.ALARM CURRENT 30.LOSS OF PHASE *.SAVE SETTING >1.COUNT >2.INTERRUT TIME 3.CONTACT WEAR
>12.CLEAR SAVED DATA
>1.OPERATION 2.FAULT 3.FAULT WAVE 4.SYSTEM 5.SET CHANGE 6.LOAD PROFILE 7.DIGNOSTIC 8.PQM 9.PQM WAVE 10.ALARM CURRENT 11.ABOVE ALL
>4.MAINTENANCE
>1.CCU 2.OPERATION 3.FAULT 4.PQM 5.COMMUNICATION >1.CCU COUNT 2.OPERATION COUNT 3.FAULT COUNT 4.PQM COUNT 5.COMCOUNT 6.COUNT ALL 7.INTERRUT TIME 8.CONTACT WEAR 9.ENERGY 10.MAX DEMAND 11.PEAK CURRENT 12.COMM BUFF 13.ABOVE ALL
>5.TIME >1.RECLOSER 2.INPUT PORTS 3.OUTPUT PORTS >1.CURRENT 2.VOLTAGE 3.FREQUENCY 4.POWER 5.ENERGY 6.DEMAND 7.UNBALANCE 8.HARMONICS 9.TRUE R.M.S 10.TD 11.CCU SEF
>6.STATUS
>4.DATA RESET
>7.METERING
>5.CCU INFO
*. Note ) Menu Structure Tree may be different according to the version and option of ETR300-R.
Figure 5-14. Menu Structure Tree
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
43
5.2.2. GLOBAL Setting

SYSTEM Set items related to system elements. Consists of POWER LINE, CURRENT SENSING, VOLTAGE SENSING, CB OPENING TIME, GAS SENSOR TYPE and TIME ZONE. TIME ZONE menu is optional and related Time Synchronization Module(GPS or IRIG). COMMUNICATION Set items related to communication elements. Consists of PROTOCOL SETUP, PROT SETUP, DIALUP MODEM, EVENT&ETC and FTP FILE TRANSFER. EVENT RECORDER Set items related to fault wave recorder elements. MONITORING Set items related to measurement and maintenance. Consists of SYNCHROCHECK, OPERATION COUNT, CONTACT WEAR, BATTERY TEST, PQM, PD and TD MONITOR. LOOP CONTROL Set items related to loop control elements. PASSCODE Set items related to passcode sequrity. Consists of PASSCODE1 and PASSCODE2. PASSCODE2 is related communication settings and PASSCODE1 is related other settings. PLC PLC (Programmable Logic Control) elements and related elements are set. This menu consists of COMMON and DI/DO sub-menu. OTHERS Set items related to other elements. Consists of TIME DISP TYPE, PANEL SLEEP TIME, Vo SELECT, FACTORY DEBUG and
AUTO SET-GROUP CHANGE.

FACTORY DEBUG menu is used only maker.
44
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
SAVE SETTING Save all changed values.
5.2.3. GROUP Setting

This menu is divided into Primary group and Alternate group for users convenient. A group is selected by ON/OFF ALTERNATE SETTINGS LED on ETR300-R panel.
(1) Select Set-group

Consists of Primary group and Alternate group. PRIMARY GROUP : If ALTERNATE SETTINGS LED is OFF, primary group settings are applied to protection elements. ALTERNATE GROUP : If ALTERNATE SETTINGS LED is ON, alternate group settings are applied to protection elements.
[GROUP SETTING] >1.PRIMARY 2.ALTERNATE
Ficture 5-15. PRIMARY GROUP and ALTERNATE GROUP [ALTERNATE SETTINGS] button is used to select a group to apply present protection elements.
(2) Select Setbank

ETR300-R has 6 SetBanks(BANK1 ~ BANK6). In this menu, Primary, Alternate and Edit bank select SetBank. Primary : Select SetBANK to be applied to System. Alternate : Press [Alternate Enable] button and select a SetBANK to apply in the system. Edit : Select a SetBANK to edit.
(3) Primary Setting

Set items related to protection elements.
(4) Alternate Setting

Protection elements and its related elements are set in this menu. Set elements are the same asPRIMARY SETTING . Protection elements and related elements are set in this menu. Set elements are the same as PRIMARY SETTING.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
45
(5) Editbank Setting

Protection elements and its related elements are set in this menu. Set elements are the same asPRIMARY SETTING . Protection elements and related elements are set in this menu. Set elements are the same as PRIMARY SETTING.
5.2.4. Event
ERT300-R Event information is shown in this menu. Consists of OPERATION, FAULT, FAULT CYCLE, SYSTEM, SET CHANGE, AVER.LOAD/MIN, PEAK.LOAD/HOUR, PEAK.LOAD/DAY, DIAGNOSTIC, PQM, ALARM CURRENT and CLEAR SAVED DATA.
5.2.5. Maintenance
Shows about Event Maintenance items. COUNT : Shows counters related with system restart and diagnostic. INTERRUT TIME : Interruption occurring cumulated time is displayed. CONTACT WEAR : Shows any damage Interrupter. DATA RESET : Maintenance related data is Reset. CCU INFO : Present ETR300-R information is displayed.
For more detail information, please refer to 9. Maintenance .
5.2.6. Time
Present time can be set and checked.
5.2.7. Status
Present status of recloser and Input/Output are displayed.
5.2.8. Metering
Shows metering values. For more details, refer to (see 12. METERING)
46
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
5.3. Using the LCD Menu

5.3.1. INITING LOGO
Important information is displayed in the initial screen for user convenience in ETR300-R. To move to other initial screen, press [ENT] button. Press [FUN] or [ESC] button in initial screen to move to Main menu. INITING LOGO
[BI-CCU(R) FOR DAS] SEQUENCE : 4 REC STATUS : OPEN SEQ[L-OUT] A-CL[ - ] [BI-CCU(R) FOR DAS] SEQUENCE : REC STATUS : SEQ[ ] A-CL[ ]
Initial Screen 1 SEQUNCE: Number of reclosing operation(0~4) is displayed. REC STATUS: Circuit Breaker Open/Close Status is displayed. CLOSE: Displays Circuit Breaker is closed. OPEN: Displays Circuit Breaker is opened. TROUBLE: It is displayed in case of Contact status is incorrect or cable connection is not completed. It is showing reclosing sequence process. If the total operation number is set for 4 times and continuous fault occurred. When SEQUENCE number 0 is displayed, SEQ[HOME] is displayed. It means reclosing ready state. When SEQUENCE number 1~3 is displayed, SEQ[RUN] is displayed. It means reclosing running state. When SEQUENCE number 3 is displayed and SEQ[L-OUT] is displayed. It means recloser lockout state. It is showing auto closing status. It is related voltage and frequency protection function, When A-CL[RUN] is displayed, voltage or frequency is normal state and auto closing timer is runnig state. NOTE : If WARING SYSTEM ERROR in the initial screen, control panel is in abnormal condition. Immediately stop operation and contact Manufacturer.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
47
INITING LOGO
A: B: C: N: 0 0 0 0

0.0/ 0.0 0.0/ 0.0 0.0/ 0.0 SEF: 0.00

/ / / SEF:
Initial Screen 2 Each phase current value is displayed(A,B,C,N)[A]. Each phase voltage is displayed(A,B,C/R,S,T) [kV]. SEF current value is displayed [A].
A: B: C: N:
GPS [LINK Success] 2010/01/07 14:48:50 [N 89D 60M 0.00S ] [E 0D 0M 0.00S ]

Initial Screen 3 If Time synchronization module(GPS or IRIG) is installed, received time synchronization data is displayed. If Time synchronization module option is not exist, GPS MODULE NOT INSTALLED is displayed. Check Time Synchronization module antenna install before checking time synchronization data. GPS receiving status display. Normal connection, [LINK Success] is displayed. Connection fail, [SAT LINK Fail] is displayed. Received time information, UTC(Universal Time Coordinated) from GPS. Local time is set by (Main Menu / Global Setting / System / Time Zone), and check Time in Main Menu. Longitude( , " , ') is displayed. Latitude( , " , ' ) is displayed.
GPS [ [ [
] ] ]
LOOP CONTROL [TIE] VS-[DV] VSDLT-[ - ] VL-[DV] VLDLT-[ - ] AUTO RESTORE T [ - ]
Initial Screen 4 If Loop control function is installed, this screen is displayed. LOOP CONTROL: [SEC], [MID], [TIE] Display a selected type. VS: [DV], [LV] Display source side voltage of recloser either dead line or live line. VL: [DV], [LV] Display load side voltage of recloser either dead line or live line. VSDLT: [ - ], [RUN] Displays loop control function is operating due to the dead line of source side. VLDLT: [ - ], [RUN] Displays loop control function is operating due to the dead line of load side. AUTO RESTORE T: [ - ], [RUN] Displays restoring status after loop control operation.
48
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
5.3.2. MAIN MENU

In the initial menu, press [FUN] button, it is moved into Main menu. If press [FUN] or [ESC] button in main menu, it is moved to the initial menu. Main menu has sub-menu as below. MAIN MENU
[MAIN MENU] >1.GLOBAL SETTING 2.GROUP SETTING 3.EVENT 4.MAINTENANCE 5.TIME 6.STATUS 7.METERING
Main Menu consists of 7 sub-menu. You can choose any sub-menu by using [] [] key. Press [ENT] key to select the sub-menu.
As above explanation, you can move and select sub-menu.
5.3.3. View Example

To see External input port status. Move to MAIN MENU / STATUS / INPUT PORTS. The following screen is displayed. MAIN MENU/ STATUS/ INPUT PORTS
[INPUT PORT] IN 101 :LO/DEASSERT IN 102 :LO/DEASSERT IN 103 :LO/DEASSERT IN 104 :LO/DEASSERT IN 105 :LO/DEASSERT IN 106 :LO/DEASSERT IN 107 :LO/DEASSERT IN 108 :LO/DEASSERT IN 201 : HI/ASSERT IN 202 : HI/ASSERT IN 203 : HI/ASSERT IN 204 : HI/ASSERT IN 205 : HI/ASSERT IN 206 : HI/ASSERT IN 207 : HI/ASSERT IN 208 : HI/ASSERT
LO/DEASSERT : Shows External Input is de-asserted, HI/ASSERT : Shows External Input is asserted.
Only 4 lines are displayed on LCD Screen, use [] [] key to see next lines.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
49
5.3.4. Setting Example

Step to change Phase Pickup current of protection elements in Primary setting. 1) Move to MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ PRIMARY/ PICKUP CURRENT / PHASE. A following screen is displayed. MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ PRIMARY/ PICKUP CURRENT / PHASE
[PICKUP CURRENT] >Phase: 500 Ground: 250 [0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
Range
(0)OFF, 10 ~ 1600A Step 1A
Default 500A
Phase pickup current. This value is primary current. Primary and secondary current is related CT ratio. Primary current = Secondary current CT ratio.
2) As above screen, to move to Phase, use [] [] key and press [ENT] key to move into value column. 3) Use [] [] keys and [] [] keys to change a new value. Press [ENT] key, then you see the changed Phase value. NOTE : You must save all changed values at Setting Save menu.
50
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
5.3.5. Setting Save

To save all changed values, steps are as follows; Move to MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ PRIMARY / SAVE SETTING and follow each step as below(Global Setting menu and Group Setting/ Alternate or EditBank menu has *.Setting Save menu). MAIN MENU / PRIMARY SETTING / SAVE SETTING To save a changed set value, press [ENT] button.
SETTING CHANGED PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE
Enter Passcode and press [ENT] button. If Passcode is correct,

ENTER PASSCODE 1 0000
screen appears; otherwise screen appears again. If the changed value is set successfully, screen is displayed for short period. If there is no change value and select *. SAVE SETTING, then,
[SAVE SETTING] * SUCCESS *
screen is displayed.
* NOTHING CHANGED *
NOTE : Changed set value is applied if the changed set value is saved. If changed set value saving is cancelled, previous value is remained.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
51
6. GLOBAL SETTING
Place the curser in GLOBAL SETTING, press [ENT] button, it is moved to GLOBAL SETTING. This menu has sub-menu as below.
[GLOBAL SETTING] >1.SYSTEM 2.COMMUNICATION 3.EVENT RECODER 4.MONITERING 5.LOOP CONTROL 6.PASSCODE 7.PLC 8.OTHERS *.SAVE SETTING
NOTE : Changed set value must be saved to be applied. When escaping from *.SAVE SETTING menu or moving to high menu, changed set value is saved by Changed set value saved message.
6.1. System
Place the curser on SYSTEM in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button, it is moved to this menu. In this menu, elements related with SYSTEM, are set and it has sub-menu as below.
[SYSTEM] >1.POWER LINE 2.CURRENT SENSING 3.VOLTAGE SENSING 4.CB OPENING TIME 5.GAS SENSOR TYPE 6.TIME ZONE
CAUTION : This setting change may influence metering and whole system, precaution is requested.
52
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.1.1. Power Line

Place a cursor on POWER LINE in SYSTEM menu, and press [ENT] button, it is moved in this menu. Set the power system information where this control is installed. GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / POWER LINE / Frequency
[POWER LINE] >Frequency: Ref.Voltage: [50/60Hz]
Range
60 A
50, 60 Step ~
Default 60*
Select the nominal power system frequency. This value is used as a default to set the optimal digital sampling rate. It is set before product delivery in accordance with spec. NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to the option type.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / POWER LINE / Reference Voltage

[POWER LINE] >Ref.Voltage: A Phase Rotation: ABC [A/B/C/NONE]
Range
A, B, C, NONE Step ~
Default A
Reference voltage set. Beside of Hard wire connection, phase connection shall be adjusted by software as well. NOTE : Depending on settings of 'Reference voltage' and 'Phase Rotation' bushing connection is changed. Refer to Table 6-1. Phase selection according to the reference voltage and phase rotation.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
53
Table 6-1. Phase selection according to the reference voltage and phase rotation.
Setting Display A(R)/IA Ref.Voltage A Rotation : Rotation : ABC ACB V11(V21) /I01 V12(V22) /I02 V13(V23) /I03 V11(V21) /I01 V13(V23) /I03 V12(V22) /I02 Source Side: 1V Ref.Voltage B Rotation : Rotation : ABC ACB V12(V22) /I02 V13(V23) /I03 V11(V21) /I01 V12(V22) /I02 V11(V21) /I01 V13(V23) /I03 Ref.Voltage C Rotation : Rotation : ABC ACB V13(V23) /I03 V13(V21) /I01 V12(V22) /I02 V13(V23) /I03 V13(V22) /I02 V11(V21) /I01
B(S)/IB C(T)/IC
Setting Display A(R)/IA Ref.Voltage A Rotation : Rotation : ABC ACB V21(V11) /I01 V22(V12) /I02 V23(V13) /I03 V21(V11) /I01 V23(V13) /I03 V22(V12) /I02
Source Side: 2V Ref.Voltage B Rotation : Rotation : ABC ACB V22(V12) /I02 V23(V13) /I03 V21(V11) /I01 V22(V12) /I02 V21(V11) /I01 V23(V13) /I03
Ref.Voltage C Rotation : Rotation : ABC ACB V23(V13) /I03 V21(V11) /I01 V22(V12) /I02 V23(V13) /I03 V22(V12) /I02 V21(V11) /I01
B(S)/IB C(T)/IC
NOTE 1. V11 and I01 are the input terminal of voltage and current on control panel. 2. () indicates Load side. 3. When Source Side set 2V, current value is calculated in software with changed CT polarity. 4. CT polarity can be adjustable. When Reference Voltage set None, depending on Phase Rotation, normal voltage and negative voltage are calculated in opposite. It does not influence any others. GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / POWER LINE / Phase Rotation
[POWER LINE] Ref.Voltage: A >Phase Rotation: ABC [ABC/ACB]
Range
ABC, ACB Step ~
Default ABC
Select the phase rotation of the power system.
54
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.1.2. Current Sensing

Place a cursor in CURRENT SENSING and press [ENT] button, it is moved to this menu. This Setting group is critical for all over-current protection features that have settings specified in multiples of CT rating. When the relay is ordered, the phase, ground, and sensitive ground CT inputs must be specified as 1 Amp. As the phase CTs are connected in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (Ia + Ib + Ic = Neutral Current = 3 I0) is used as the input for protection of the neutral over-current. In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration, the ground CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive earth input may be used. In this case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered. For additional details on CT connections, refer to (see 13.11. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram). GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / PHA CT Ratio
[CURRENT SENSING] >PHA CT Ratio: 1000 GND CT Ratio: 1000 [1~2000:1]
Range
1 ~ 2000 Step 1
Default 1000 Set phase CT ratio.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / GND CT Ratio

[CURRENT SENSING] >PHA CT Ratio: 1000 >GND CT Ratio: 1000 [1~5000:1]
Range
1 ~ 5000 Step 1
Default 1000 Set ground CT ratio.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / SEF CT Ratio

[CURRENT SENSING] >SEF CT Ratio:1000.0 >PHA CT Pol: FOR 0(OFF),0~1000.0:0.1
Range
0(OFF), 0.1 ~ 1000.0 Step 0.1
Default 1000.0 Set sensitive earth CT ratio.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / PHA CT Polarity

[CURRENT SENSING] CSEF CT Ratio: 133.3 >PHA CT Pol: FOR [FOR/REV]
Range
Forward, Reverse Step ~
Default Forward Set phase CT pole direction.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
55
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / SEF CT Polarity

[CURRENT SENSING] CPHA CT Pol: FOR >SEF CT Pol: FOR [FOR/REV]
Range
Forward, Reverse Step ~
Default Forward
Set sensitive earth CT pole direction.
6.1.3. Voltage Sensing

Place a curser in VOLTAGE SENSING and press [ENT] button, it is moved to this menu. ETR300-R has 2(Two) voltage connectors. Voltage connectors are receiving Source side and Load side line voltages. To measure received voltages, set Voltage connectors Connect Type, 2nd Nominal Voltage and VT Ratio. With Line VTs installed, the ETR300-R can be used to perform voltage measurements, power calculations, and directional control of over-current elements. And with Line VTs installed, the ETR300-R can be used to perform synchronism elements. GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 1V Connect Type
[VOLTAGE SENSING] >1V CON-Type: WYE >1V 2nd(V): 4.00 [NONE/WYE/DELTA]
Range
NONE, WYE, DELTA Step ~
Default WYE Connector) .
Select the voltage type of system that input to 1V(1st Voltage NONE : VT non installed. Select NON if Voltage Sensing item is not used. WYE : If Voltage Connect Type of 2V is Y-Type, Select WYE. DELTA : If Voltage Connect Type of 2V is -Type, Select DELTA.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 1V 2nd(V)

[VOLTAGE SENSING] >1V 2nd(V): 4.00 >1V Ratio: 3300.0 [2.00~350.00:0.01V]
Range
2.00 ~ 350.00V Step 0.01V
Default 4.00
Enter the second rated voltage(V) of 1V(1st Voltage connector). This setting is the second rated voltage that entered in the relay about line rated voltage.
56
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 1V Ratio

[VOLTAGE SENSING] >1V 2nd(V): 4.0 >1V Ratio: 3300.0 [10.0~6500.0:0.1]
Range
10.0 ~ 6500.0 Step 0.1
Default 3300.0
Enter the VT rated rate of 1V(1st Voltage connector).
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Connect Type

[VOLTAGE SENSING] >2V CON-Type: WYE 2V 2nd(V): 4.0 [NONE/WYE/DELTY]
Range
NONE, WYE, DELTA Step ~
Default WYE Connector) .
Select the voltage type of system that input to 2V(2nd Voltage NONE : VT non installed. Select NON if Voltage Sensing item is not used. WYE : If Voltage Connect Type of 2V is Y-Type, Select WYE. DELTA : If Voltage Connect Type of 2V is -Type, Select DELTA.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V 2nd(V)

[VOLTAGE SENSING] >2V 2nd(V): 4.00 >2V Ratio: 3300.0 [2.00~350.00:0.01V]
Range
2.00 ~ 350.00V Step 0.01V
Default 4.00
Enter the second rated voltage(V) of 2V(2nd Voltage Connector). This setting is the second rated voltage that entered in the relay about line rated voltage.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Ratio

[VOLTAGE SENSING] >2V 2nd(V): 4.0 >2V Ratio: 3300.0 [10.0~6500.0:0.1]
Range
10.0 ~ 6500.0 Step 0.1
Default 3300.0
Enter the VT Rated Rate of 2V(2nd Voltage Connector).
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
57
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V INS-Type

[VOLTAGE SENSING] >2V Ratio: 3300.0 >2V INS-Type: 3P [3P/1P-R/1P-S/1P-S]
Range
3P, 1P-R, 1P-S, 1P-T Step ~
Default 3P
Insert the type of sensing voltage for the recloser body unit. 3P : Three phases voltage sensing installed 1P-R : One phase voltage sensing installed to the R phase of the recloser body unit. 1P-S : One phase voltage sensing installed to the S phase of the recloser body unit. 1P-T : One phase voltage sensing installed to the T phase of the recloser body unit. NOTE : When the voltage sensor to the load side is installed to only one phase or none of the phase, the following functions performed by the voltage measurement are operated incorrectly if this setting is changed. Synchronism Check Interrupt, Sag and Swell Detection PQM Voltage Unbalance Detection PQM Under and Over Voltage Detection PQM Loop Control Directional Control Under and Over Voltage Protection Live Line Detection Phase Open/Loss Detection Loss of Phase Live Load Blocking
NOTE : The setting is supported from Ver. 3.8 of ETR300-R.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / Source Side

[VOLTAGE SENSING] >2V Ratio: 3300.0 >Source Side: 1V [1V/2V]
Range
1V, 2V Step ~
Default 1V Select the Source side of System.
According to the selected value the indication of MAIN MENU/ METERING/ VOLTAGE change. In the VOLTAGE screen, indicate ABC in the Source Side, and RST in the Load Side.
58
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Setting Examples
Depending on voltage level, PT Ratio and secondary rate are set before delivery. For instance, 38kV level case, based on 33000V line, Ratio is set for 3300.0 : 1, and secondary is set for 5.77V. Ratio shall not be changed. When reference voltage changes, secondary shall also be changed. In case that system voltage is 34000V, PT Ratio remains the same 3300.0, but secondary voltage shall be changed to 5.95V. Below table shows, PT ratio and Secondary voltage setting depending on System voltage level. Table 6-2. PT Ratio and 2nd Voltage Relation System Voltage Level 38kV 27kV 15kV Reference line Voltage 33000V(L-L)/3 22863V(L-L)/3 10000V(L-L)/3 PT Ratio Setting 3300.0 3300.0 3300.0 2nd Voltage Setting 5.77V 4V 1.75V
6.1.4. CB Opening Time

Place the curser on CB OPENING TIME in SYSTEM menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. Reclosers complete opening time is calculated as follows. Total CB Clearing Time = Relay Release Time + CB Trip Time (CB Opening Time + Arcing Time) To apply TCC time to the complete opening time, CT trip time shall be considered. GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / CB OPENING TIME
[CB OPENING TIME] >Time: 0.016 [0.000~1.000:0.001s]
Range
0.000 ~ 1.000 sec Step 0.001 sec
Default 0.016
. EXEMPLE) In case that TCC value applied to ERT300-R is 1.00sec and CB Trip Time is 30msec + 10msec, actual circuit breakers Clearing Time is 1.00 + 30msec + 10msec = 1.04sec. The difference between TCC value and actual Clearing Time, 40msec needs to be set for CB Trip Time(40msec). This setting time compensates CB Trip Time.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
59
6.1.5. GAS SENSOR TYPE

Place the curser on GAS SENSOR TYPE in SYSTEM menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / GAS SENSOR TYPE
[GAS SENSOR TYPE] >Type: NONE [NONE/TYPE1/TYPE2]
Range
NONE, TYPE1, TYPE2 Step -
Default NONE
This is set in accordance with tank before delivery. It is set depending on tank insulation method. If tank is gas insulated type, it shall take TYPE1 or TYPE2. NONE : It means non-gas type, Solid insulated type.
6.1.6. TIME ZONE

Place the curser on TIME ZONE in SYSTEM menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. This setting is used to calculate out local time by using received time information from Time Synchronization Module(GPS or IRIG). This menu is used when Time Synchronization Module option is installed. Select standard time zone for user county. Sync time(sec) is used periodic time synch by Time Synchronization module when Time Synchronization module is installed. GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / TIME ZONE / Sign
[TIME ZONE] >Sign: Hour: [+/-]
Range
+ 9
+, Step -
Default +
Display the receive UTC time and the local time off-set direction. Local time is faster than UTC time, select +, otherwise, select -.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / TIME ZONE / Hour

[TIME ZONE] >Sign: >Hour: [0~23:1hr]
Range
+ 9
0~23 hour(s) Step 1 hour
Default 9
Set the difference of Hour between UTC time and Local time.
60
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / TIME ZONE / Min

[TIME ZONE] >Min: >Sync Time: [0~59:1min]
Range
0 60
0~59 min Step 1 min
Default 0
Set the difference of Minute between UTC and Local time.
NOTE Korea Local time is 9 hour faster than UTC time, set it as follows (+9:00); Sing : +, Hour : 9, Min : 0 The default value of above settings can vary according to the option type. NOTE If the setting values associated with GMT are set up incorrectly, the problems can be happened as follows. If the "Reference Time Type" is set to be GMT, the time of the internal clock in ETMFC101_N can be changed incorrectly at time synchronization. If the time type of the DNP communication event is set to be GMT, the time of event transmitted is not correct. GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / TIME ZONE / Time Syn Ref
[TIME ZONE] >Min: 0 >Tims Syn Ref: GMT [LOCAL/GMT]
Range
LOCAL, GMT Step ~
Default GMT with Time Synchronization module.
Set Reference Time Type when time need in a device is synchronized
NOTE : The setting is supported from version 3.6 of ETR300-R.
NOTE In fact, even though time synchronization module is installed, if GPS/IRIG? setting is set with "NO" in GLOCBAL SETTING / OTHERS / H/W OPTION menu, the time synchronization module is not able to be used.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
61
6.2. Communication
Place the curser on COMMUNIATION in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Communication and its related elements are sent in this menu and it has submenu as below.
[COMMUNICATION] >1.PROTOCOL SETUP 2.PORT SETUP 3.DIALUP MODEM 4.EVENT&ETC SETUP 5.FTP FILE TRANSFER *.SAVE SETTINGS
6.2.1. Protocol Setup

Place the curser on PROTOCOL SETUP in COMMUNICATION menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Communication protocol of ETR300-R is set and it has sub-menus as below.
[PROTOCOL SETUP] >1.DNP3 S1 2.DNP3 S2 3.IEC870-5-101 4.IEC870-5-104 5.MODBUS
ETR300-R supports DNP3, IEC60870-5-101, IEC60870-5-104 and MODBOUS Communication protocol. . This menu may be changed depending on Users request. Each protocol setting details are as below.
62
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.2.1.1. DNP3 Protocol Setup

ETR300-R can be programmed for communication using the DNP3 through communication port1, port2, port3 or port4. For details, refer to DNP3 Protocol Technical Manual Move to MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 S1 or DNP3 S2 to select setting for DNP3 Protocol. Setting items of DNP3 S1 and DNP3 S2 menu are same as following. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Function Range
[DNP3 SLAVE1] >Function: ENABLE COM Port: PORT1 [DISABLE/ENABLE]
DISABLE, ENABLE SLAVE1 : ENABLE SLAVE2 : DISABLE Step ~
Default
To select DNP3 Slave1 or Slave2, set ENABLE.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / COM Port

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >COM Port: PORT1 D/L Confirm: SOME [PORT1 PORT4]
Range Default
PORT1, PORT2, PORT3 SLAVE1 : PORT1 SLAVE2 : PORT2 Step ~
Select DNP3 communication port.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / D/L Confirm

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >D/L Confirm: SOME >D/L FrameDly: 100 [NO/YES/SOME]
Range
NO, YES, SOME Step ~
Default SOME
Choose whether Data Link Confirm is used or not. NO : Data Link Confirm is not used. YES : Data Link Confirm is used. SOME : Data Link Confirm is used in case of Multi-frame. When Data Link Confirm use-setting, it shall be set as Host setting. If the setting is different from Host setting, the communication may be failed due to Data Link Reset.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
63
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / D/L FrameDly

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >D/L Confirm: SOME >D/L FrameDly: 100 [10~5000:10ms]
Range
10 ~ 5000 msec Step 10 msec
Default 100 Set Data Link frame Delay Time.
In case that D/L Confirm setting is OFF, it means Frame Interval time when multi-frame occurs. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / D/L Retries
[DNP3 SLAVE1] >D/L Retries: 0 D/L Timeout: 10 [0~2:1]
Range
0, 1, 2 Step 1
Default 0 layer.
Enter the number of retries that will be issued for a given data link
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / D/L Timeout

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >D/L Timeout: 10 A/L Timeout: 15 [1~255:1s]
Range
1 ~ 255 sec Step 1 sec
Default 10
Set a waiting time between Data Link Frame transfer till to receive Data Link Confirm(ACK) of Master. If there is no Data Link Confirm receiving and Data Link retry is available, ETR300-R will send Data Link Frame again.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / A/L Timeout

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >A/L Timeout: 15 Master Addr: 65534 [1~255:1s]
Range Default
1 ~ 255 sec SLAVE1 : 15 SLAVE2 : 30 Step 1 sec
Set a waiting time for Slave Application to receive A/L Confirm(ACK) from Master Application, in case that Confirm is requested during Data transfer from Slave Application to Master Application. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Master Addr
[DNP3 SLAVE1] >Master Addr: 65534 DNP Address: 1 [0~65534:1]
Range
0 ~ 65534 Step 1
Default 65534 Enter the master station address.
64
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / DNP Address

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >DNP Address: 1 SBO Time: 15 [0~65534:1]
Range Default
0 ~ 65534 SLAVE1 : 1 SLAVE2 : 0 Step 1
Enter the slave(ETR300-R) address. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / SBO Time
[DNP3 SLAVE1] >SBO Time: 15 Init Unsol: ENABLE [1~255:1s]
Range
Default 15
Set a time interval between Select Function and Operate Function. If no operation command during set time, Select command is cancelled.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Init Unsol

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >Init Unsol: ENABLE Unsol Time: 5 [DISABLE/ENABLE]
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE Step ~
Default ENABLE
Select a use of re-start Initial Unsolicited Response. ENABLE : On Power Up, Initial Unsolicited Response Message is transferred. DISABLE : On Power Up, Initial Unsolicited Response Message is not transferred.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Unsol Time Range

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >Unsol Time: 5 >Unsol Type: NOTRIG [0~60:1s]
Default 5
Set a delay time of reporting, in case Unsolicited mode event is occurred. Reporting is conducted if no new Event is occurred within the time.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Unsol Type Range

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Unsol Time: 5 >Unsol Type: NOTRIG [NOTRIG/PERIOD]
NOTRIG, PERIOD Step -
Default NOTRIG
NOTRG: If there is no more event occurrence during setting unsolicited time after the last event occurs, the event data is transmitted. PERIOD: Unsolicited message is sent to a master with whole event data occurring after setting unsolicited time starting and elapsing when the first event occurs.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
65
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Unsol Retries Range

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >Unsol Type: NOTRIG >Unsol Retries : 0 [0~2:1]
0, 1, 2 SLAVE1 : 0 SLAVE2 : 1 Step 1
Default
Set the Unsol Retries when there isnt a confirm abouth Unsol message from the main device. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Class 1
[DNP3 SLAVE1] >Class 1: ENABLE Class 2: ENABLE [DISABLE/ENABLE]
Range
Default ENABLE that Event is occurred in Class1.
Select whether to send Unsolicited Response or not to master in case
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Class 2

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >Class 1: ENABLE >Class 2: ENABLE [DISABLE/ENABLE]
Range
Default ENABLE occurred in Class2.
Select whether to send Unsolicited Response to master in case Event is
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Class 3

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >Class 2: ENABLE >Class 3: ENABLE [DISABLE/ENABLE]
Range
Default ENABLE occurred in Class3.
Select whether to send Unsolicited Response to master, in case Event is
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / TCP/UDP Select

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >TCP/UDP Select: TCP TCP Port : 20000 [TCP/UDP]
Range
TCP, UDP Step ~
Default TCP
Select TCP or UDT communication at the use of Port3(Ethernet).
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / TCP Port

[DNP3 SLAVE1] TCP/UDP Select: TCP >TCP Port : 20000 [TCP/UDP]
Range
0 ~ 65535 Step 1
Default 20000
Set the TCP/IP Port number of ETR300R for TCP communication.
66
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / UDP Port

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >UDP Port : 20001 Master IP Oct1: 192 [TCP/UDP]
Range
0 ~ 65535 Step 1
Default 20001
Set the TCP/IP Port number of ETR300R for UDP communication.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Master IP Oct 1~4

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >Master IP Oct1: >Master IP Oct2: >Master IP Oct3: >Master IP Oct4:
Range
0 0 0 0
0 ~ 255 Step 1
Default 0*
Select the IP Address for DNP3 Communication. IP Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx

Master IP Oct1,2,3,4 is ,,, NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to the option type.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / keep Alive Check Tm

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >Master IP Oct4: >K-Alv Check Tm: [O(OFF),1~600:1s]
Range
0 4
0(OFF), 1 ~ 600 sec Step 1sec
Default 4 during the idle status.
Set the time period that check the communication connecting status
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Fragment Size

[DNP3 SLAVE1] K-Alv Check Tm: 4 >Fragment Size: 2048 [64~2048:1]
Range
64 ~ 2048 Step 1
Default 2048 Set the size of DNP fragment.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Time Req(m)

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >Fragment Size: 2048 >Time Req(m): OFF [0(OFF),1~30000:1]
Range
0(OFF), 1 ~ 30000 min Step 1
Default OFF received from master station.
Set Time Sync in order to synchronize internal system clock with time
NOTE : The setting is supported from version 3.6 of ETR300-R.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
67
6.2.1.2. IEC60870-5-101 Protocol Setup

ETR300-R can be programmed for communication using the IEC60870-5-101 through communication port1, port2 or port3. Move to MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101 to select setting for IEC60870-5-101. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Function Range
[IEC870-5-101] >Function: DISABLE COM Port: PORT1 [DISABLE/ENABLE]
Default DISABLE Set an use of IEC60870-5-101.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ COM Port

[IEC870-5-101] >Function: DISABLE >COM Port: PORT1 [PORT1/PORT2/PORT3]
Range
PORT1, PORT2, PORT3 Step ~
Default PORT1
Select a port to use IEC60870-5-101 communication.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Address

[IEC870-5-101] >COM Port: PORT1 >Address : 1 [1~65535:1]
Range
1 ~ 65535 Step 1
Default 1 unication.
Enter the slave(ETR300-R) address for IEC60870-5-101 comm-
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ ASDU Addr

[IEC60870-5-101] >ASDU Addr: 0 >Cyclic Period: 60 [0~65535:1]
Range
0~65535 Step 1
Default 0
Select the Application Service Data Unit Address.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Cyclic Period

Range
1~60000 sec Step 1 sec
Default 60 Select the Cyclic Period.
It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.
68
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Event Period

[IEC60870-5-101] >Cyclic Period: 60 >Event Period: 15 [0~255:1s]
Range
0~255 sec Step 1sec
Default 15
Select the delay time before events are sent. Single event or several events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay time, the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Retries

[IEC60870-5-101] >Retries: 0 Conf.Timeout: 10 [0~2:1]
Range
Applicable for lower than Ver 3.6 of ETR300-R : 0 ~ 2 Applicable for Ver 3.6 or higher of ETR300-R Step 1 : 0 ~ 255
Default 0 Set the Data retires number.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Conf. Timeout

[IEC60870-5-101] >Retries: 0 >Conf.Timeout: 10 [1~255:1s]
Range
Default 10
Set the wait time till receive the Data Confirm (ACK) of master after transfer the Data. If there isnt the Confirm during this setting time and Data retries is available, ETR300 transfers the Data again.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Max Poll Tim

[IEC60870-5-101] >Conf.Timeout: 10 >Max Poll Time: 10 [1~255:1s]
Range
Default 10 Set the Data Polling period time.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ ADSU Addr Size*

[IEC60870-5-101] >ADSU Addr Size: 2 >Link Confirm:ALWAYS [1~2:1]
Range
1~2 Step 1
Default 2
Enter the size of cause of transmission.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
69
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Link Confirm*

[IEC60870-5-101] >ADSU Addr Size: 2 >Link Confirm:ALWAYS [NEVER/ALWAYS]
Range
NEVER, ALWAYS Step ~
Default ALWAYS Enter the Link layer confirm mode.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Link Addr Size*

[IEC60870-5-101] >Link Addr Size: 1 >Rx Frame Size: 261 [1~2:1]
Range
1~2 Step 1
Default 1 Enter the size of link address.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Rx Frame Size*

[IEC60870-5-101] >Link Addr Size: 1 >Rx Frame Size: 261 [0~261:1]
Range
0 ~ 261 Step 1
Default 261
Enter the maximum size of received frame.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Rx Frame TO*

[IEC60870-5-101] >Rx Frame Size: 261 >Rx Frame TO : 15 [0(OFF),0~255:1s]
Range
0(OFF), 1 ~ 255 sec Step 1 sec
Default 15 receiving the frame sync.
Enter the maximum amount of time to wait for a complete frame after
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Tx Frame Size*

[IEC60870-5-101] >Tx Frame Size: 261 >COT Size : 1 [0~261:1]
Range
0 ~ 261 Step 1
Default 261
Enter the maximum size of transmitted frame.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ COT Size*

[IEC60870-5-101] >COT Size : 1 >IOA Size : 2 [1~2:1]
Range
1~2 Step 1
Default 1
Enter the size of cause of transmission.
70
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ IOA Size*

[IEC60870-5-101] >COT Size : 1 >IOA Size : 2 [1~3:1]
Range
1~3 Step 1
Default 2
Enter the size of information object address.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ One Ch Response*

[IEC60870-5-101] >One Ch Response: NO >Frame Repet TO: 30 [NO/YES]
Range
NO, YES Step ~
Default NO
This allows to send one character response instead of a fixed length NACK when no response data available.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Fram Repet TO*

[IEC60870-5-101] >One Ch Response: NO >Frame Repet TO: 30 [0(OFF),0~255:1s]
Range
0(OFF), 1~255sec Step 1 sec
Default 30 layer timeout).
Enter the time out for repetition of frames(or incremental application
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101 / Select Timeout*

[IEC60870-5-101] >Select Timeout: 5 >CMD Termination:YES [0(OFF),0~255:1]
Range
0(OFF), 1~255 Step 1
Default 5
Enter the period after a previously received select will timeout.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ CMD Termination*

[IEC60870-5-101] >Select Timeout: 5 >CMD Termination:YES [NO/YES]
Range
NO, YES Step ~
Default YES
Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of commands other than set point commands.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ CSE Termination*

[IEC60870-5-101] >CMD Termination:YES >CSE Termination:YES [NO/YES]
Range
NO, YES Step ~
Default YES point commands.
Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
71
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Clock Sync Evt*

[IEC60870-5-101] >CSE Termination:YES >Clock Sync Evt:YES [NO/YES]
Range
NO, YES Step ~
Default YES
Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ MSP Time-Tag**

[IEC60870-5-101] >MSP Time-Tag: CP56 >MIT Time-Tag: CP56 [CP56,CP24]
Range
CP56, CP24 Step ~
Default CP56
Select whether a time tag format for single-point. CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a. CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ MIT Time-Tag**

Range
CP56, CP24 Step ~
Default CP56
Select whether a time tag format for integrated totals. CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a. CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ MME Time-Tag**

[IEC60870-5-101] >MME Time-Tag: CP56 >Flt Time-Tag: CP56 [CP56,CP24]
Range
CP56, CP24 Step ~
Default CP56
Select whether a time tag format for measured value and normalized value for general event except for fault current event. CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a. CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.

Range
CP56, CP24 Step ~
Default CP56
72
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
NOTE : 1. The above settings marked with * shall be Ver 3.6 or higher of ETR300-R to be indicated. 2. In case ETR300 is the standard type, the above settings marked with ** shall be Ver 3.9 or higher of ETR300-R to be indicated. 3. In case ETR300 is the External O/I option type, the above settings marked with ** shall be Ver 4.10 or higher of ETR300-R to be indicated.
6.2.1.3. IEC60870-5-104 Protocol Setup

ETR300-R can be programmed for communication using the IEC60870-5-104 through communication port3. Move to MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104 to select setting for IEC60870-5-104. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Function Range
[IEC870-5-104] >Function: DISABLE COM Port: PORT3 [DISABLE/ENABLE]
Default DISABLE
Set an use of IEC60870-5-104 communication.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ COM Port

[IEC870-5-104] >Function: ON >COM Port: PORT3 [PORT1-PORT4]
Range
PORT3 Step ~
Default PORT3
Set a port for IEC60870-5-104 communication. It is fixed in PORT3.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ ASDU Addr

[IEC60870-5-104] >COM Port: PORT3 >ASDU Addr: 0 [0~65535:1]
Range
0~65535 Step 1
Default 0
Select the Application Service Data Unit Address.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Cyclic Period

Range
1~60000 sec Step 1 sec
Default 60 Select the Cyclic Period.
It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
73
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Time Out(t0)

[IEC60870-5-104] >Cyclic Period: 60 >Time Out(t0): 120 [1~255:1s]
Range
1~255 sec Step 1
Default 120
Select the Timeout for connection establishment.

[IEC60870-5-104] >Time Out(t1): 15 >Time Out(t2): 10 [1~255:1s]
Range
1~255 sec Step 1
Default 15
Select the Timeout for send or test APDUs.

Range
1~255 sec Step 1
Default 10 ( t2<t1).
Select the Timeout for acknowledgements in case of no data message

Range
1~255 sec Step 1
Default 20
Select the Timeout for sending test frame in case of a long idle state.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Event Period

[IEC60870-5-104] >Time Out(t3): 20 >Event Period: 15 [0~255:1s]
Range
0~255 sec Step 1
Default 15
Select the delay time before events are sent. Single event or several events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay time, the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ TCP Port No Range

[IEC60870-5-104] >Event Period: 5 >TCP Port No: 2404 [01~65535:1]
0 ~ 65535 Step 1
Default 2404 communication.
Set the TCP/IP Port of ETR300 for IEC60870-5-104 Protocol
74
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Rx Frame Size*

[IEC60870-5-104] >Rx Frame Size: 255 >Tx Frame Size: 255 [0~255:1]
Range
0 ~ 255 Step 1
Default 255
Enter the maximum size of received frame.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Tx Frame Size*

[IEC60870-5-104] >Rx Frame Size: 255 >Tx Frame Size: 255 [0~255:1]
Range
0 ~ 255 Step 1
Default 255
Enter the maximum size of transmitted frame.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104 / Select Timeout*

[IEC60870-5-104] >Select Timeout: 5 >CMD Termination:YES [0(OFF),0~255:1]
Range
0(OFF), 1~255 Step 1
Default 5
Enter the period after a previously received select will timeout.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ CMD Termination*

[IEC60870-5-104] >Select Timeout: 5 >CMD Termination:YES [NO/YES]
Range
NO, YES Step ~
Default YES
Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of commands other than set point commands.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ CSE Termination*

[IEC60870-5-104] >CMD Termination:YES >CSE Termination:YES [NO/YES]
Range
NO, YES Step ~
Default YES point commands.
Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Clock Sync Evt*

[IEC60870-5-104] >CSE Termination:YES >Clock Sync Evt:YES [NO/YES]
Range
NO, YES Step ~
Default YES
Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
75
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ MSP Time-Tag**

Range
CP56, CP24 Step ~
Default CP56
Select whether a time tag format for single-point. CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a. CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.

Range
CP56, CP24 Step ~
Default CP56
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ MME Time-Tag**

Range
CP56, CP24 Step ~
Default CP56
Select whether a time tag format for measured value and normalized value for general event except for fault current event. CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a. CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.

Range
CP56, CP24 Step ~
Default CP56
NOTE : 1. The above settings marked with * shall be Ver 3.6 or higher of ETR300-R to be indicated. 2. In case ETR300 is the standard type, the above settings marked with ** shall be Ver 3.9 or higher of ETR300-R to be indicated. 3. In case ETR300 is the External O/I option type, the above settings marked with ** shall be Ver 4.10 or higher of ETR300-R to be indicated.
76
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.2.1.4. MODBUS Protocol Setup

ETR300-R can be programmed for communication using the MODBUS through communication port1, port2 or port3. Move to MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS to select setting for MODBUS Protocol. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Function Range
[MODBUS] >Function: DISABLE COM Port: PORT3 [DISABLE/ENABLE]
Default DISABLE
Set whether to use MODBUS communication or not.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ COM Port

[MODBUS] >Function: ON PORT3 >COM Port: [PORT1/PORT2/PORT3]
Range
PORT1, PORT2, PORT3 Step ~
Default PORT3
Select MODBUS communication port.
GLOBAL SETTING/COMMUNICATION/PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ TCP/UDP Select Range

[MODBUS] >TCP/UDP Select: TCP >TCP Port: 502 [TCP/UDP]
TCP, UDP Step ~
Default TCP
Select TCP or UDT communication at the use of Port3(Ethernet).
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS / TCP Port Range

[MODBUS] >TCP Port: 502 >UDP Port: 20001 [1~65535:1]
1 ~ 65535 Step 1
Default 502 Set TCP port number of ETR300-R.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS / UDP Port Range

[MODBUS] TCP Port: 502 >UDP Port: 20001 [0~65535:1]
0 ~ 65535 Step 1
Default 20001
Set UDP port number of ETR300-R.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
77
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Slave Address

[MODBUS] >Slave Address: 1 Tx Delay: 0.05 [1~254:1]
Range
1 ~ 254 Step 1
Default 1 Enter the Modbus address.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Tx Delay

[MODBUS] Slave Address: 1 >Tx Delay: 0.05 [0.00~300.00:0.01]
Range
0.00(OFF), 0.01 ~ 300.00 sec Step 0.01
Default 0.05 sec
Delay time of sending Real data after RTS Signal is on.
6.2.2. Port Setup

Place the curser on PORT SETUP in COMMUNICATIN menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. ETR300-R communication port and related elements are set in this menu and it has submenu as below.
[PORT SETUP] >1.PORT1(232) 2.PORT2(485) 3.PORT3(ETHERNET) 4.PORTF(232)
6.2.2.1. PORT1(232) Setup

ETR300-R side panel PORT1 and related elements are set. Move to MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1 (232) to select setting for PORT1. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ Baud Rate
[PROT1(232)] >Baud Rate: 9600 Parity Bit: NONE [1200 ~ 19200 bps]
Range
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps Step ~
Default 9600 Select the baud rate for PORT1.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ Parity Bit

[PROT1(232)] Baud Rate: 1200 >Parity Bit: NONE [NONE/ODD/EVEN]
Range
NONE, ODD, EVEN Step ~
Default NONE Select whether to use Parity Bit.
78
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ Data Bit

[PROT1(232)] Parity Bit: NONE >Data Bit: 8 [7~8:1]
Range
7, 8 Step ~
Default 8 Select the Data Bit.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ Stop Bit

[PROT1(232)] Data Bit: >Stop Bit: [1~2:1]
Range
8 1
1, 2 Step ~
Default 1 Select the Stop Bit.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ Modem Sel

[PROT1(232)] >Modem Sel: 4W >CTS Usage: ON [2W/4W/DIAL/NONE]
Range
2W, 4W, DIAL, NONE Step ~
Default 4W Select a modem for communication.
2W : 2 wire private line is used and continuously Carrier is monitored to control data flow by DCD(Data Carrier Detect). 4W : 4 wire private line is used and RTS(Request To Send) and CTS(clear to Send) signal are used to control data flow. DIAL : Dial-Up1 modem is used. NONE : Not used. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ CTS Usage
[PROT1(232)] >Modem Sel: 4W >CTS Usage: ENABLE [DISABLE/ENABLE]
Range
Default ENABLE
Select whether to use CTS signal or not. ENABLE : After confirm CTS signal is Asserted, transfer a data. DISABLE : Regardless of CTS signal, transfer a data.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ DCD Usage

[PROT1(232)] >DCD Usage: DISABLE >RTS Usage: AUTO [DISABLE/ENABLE]
Range
Default DISABLE Set whether to use DCD signal.
ENABLE : After confirming DCD signal is Deasserted, transfer a data. DISABLE: Regardless of DCD signal, transfer a data.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
79
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ RTS Usage

[PROT1(232)] >DCD Usage: OFF >RTS Usage: AUTO [OFF/ON/AUTO]
Range
OFF, ON, AUTO Step ~
Default AUTO
ON : RTS signal of ETR300-R is always ON(Assert). OFF : RTS signal of ETR300-R is always OFF(Deassert). AUTO : On requesting data transfer to Modem, after RTS signal of ETR300-R is on and after data transfer completion, RTS signal of ETR300-R is off.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ CTS CheckOut

[PROT1(232)] >CTS CheckOut: 2 >DCD CheckOut: 5000 [1~255:1s]
Range
Default 2
Set a waiting time that waits Modems confirmation on RTS signal which informs that ETR300-R is ready to transfer a data. If there is no CTS response within a set time, RTU confirms CTS Fail and does not transfer the data. It is available if CTS Usage setting is ON.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ DCD CheckOut

[PROT1(232)] >CTS CheckOut: 2 >DCD CheckOut: 5000 [10~30000:5ms]
Range
Default 5000
Set a delay time of DCD signal check which determine modem status before sending RTS signal in 2 wire communication type. After a set time, if DCD signal is ON, ETR300-R does not transfer the data and treat it as DCD Fail. It is available if DCD Usage setting is ON.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ TX PreDelay

[PROT1(232)] DCD CheckOut: 5000 >TX PreDelay: 10 [10~500:5ms]
Range
Default 10
Set a tx pre-delay time. It delayed TX signal after CTS signal check.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ TX PostDelay

[PROT1(232)] TX PreDelay: >TX PostDelay: [10~500:5ms]
Range
10 50
Default 50
Set a tx post-delay time. It delayed RTS off after TX finished.
80
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.2.2.2. PORT2(485) Setup

Related elements with PORT2 in side panel of ETR300-R are set. Move to MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2 (485) to select setting for PORT2. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2(485)/ Baud Rate
[PROT2(485)] >Baud Rate: 9600 Parity Bit: NONE [1200 ~ 19200 bps]
Range
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps Step ~
Default 9600 Select the baud rate for PORT2.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2(485)/ Parity Bit

[PROT2(485)] Baud Rate: 1200 >Parity Bit: NONE [NONE/ODD/EVEN]
Range
NONE, ODD, EVEN Step ~
Default NONE
Set whether to use Parity Bit, and set a type.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2(485)/ Data Bit

[PROT2(485)] Parity Bit: NONE >Data Bit: 8 [7~8:1]
Range
7, 8 Step ~
Default 8 Select the Data Bit.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2(485)/ Stop Bit

[PROT2(485)] Data Bit: >Stop Bit: [1~2:1]
Range
8 1
1, 2 Step ~
Default 1 Select the Stop Bit.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2(485)/ Line Type

[PROT2(485)] >Line Type: RS422 CA Delay: 1.00 [RS422/RS485]
Range
RS422, RS485 Step ~
Default RS422
Select a physical port for communication.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2(485)/ CA Delay

[PROT2(485)] >Line Type: RS422 >CA Delay: 1.00 [0.00~240.00:0.01]
Range
0.00 ~ 240.00 Step 0.01 sec
Default 1.00
Set a delay time from data reced till transferring a reply data.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
81
6.2.2.3. PORT3(EHTERNET) Setup

Related elements with PORT3 in side panel of ETR300-R are set. Move to MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT3 (ETHERNET) to select setting for PORT3. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ PORT3/ IP Addr Oct1 ~ 4
[PORT3(ETHERNET)] >IP Addr Oct1: 0 IP Addr Oct2: 0 IP Addr Oct3: 0 IP Addr Oct4: 0
Range
0 ~ 255 Step 1
Default 0*
Select the IP Address for ETR300-R. IP Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx

IP Addr1,2,3,4 is ,,, NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to the option type.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ PORT3/ Gateway Oct1 ~ 4

[PORT3(ETHERNET)] >Gateway Oct1: 0 Gateway Oct2: 0 Gateway Oct3: 0 Gateway Oct4: 0
Range
0 ~ 255 Step 1
Default 0* Select the Gateway Address. Gateway Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx

Gateway Addr1,2,3,4 is ,,, NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to the option type.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ PORT3/ SubnetMask Oct1 ~ 4

[PORT3(ETHERNET)] >SubnetMask Oct1: 0 SubnetMask Oct2: 0 SubnetMask Oct3: 0 SubnetMask Oct4: 0
Range
0 ~ 255 Step 1
Default 0*
Select the Subnet Mask Address for ETR300-R. Subnet Mask Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx

Subnet Mask Addr1,2,3,4 is ,,, NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to the option type.
82
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ PORT3/ keep Alive Function Range
[PORT3(ETHERNET)] >K-Alv Func: ENABLE >K-Alv Idle T: 3.00 [DISABLE/ENABLE]
Default ENABLE status check function.
Select whether to use or not the Ethernet communication connecting
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ PORT3/ k-Alv Idle T Range

[PORT3(ETHERNET)] >K-Alv Func: ENABLE >K-Alv Idle T: 4 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Default 4
If Idle status is maintained during the setting time, check the communication connecting maintainance status.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ PORT3/ k-Alv Interval Range

[PORT3(ETHERNET)] >K-Alv Interval: 2 >K-Alv Retry: 3 [0~600:1s]
Default 2
After checking the communication connecting status, if there isnt any reply during the setting time, check again the status.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ PORT3/ k-Alv Interval Range

[PORT3(ETHERNET)] >K-Alv Interval: 2 >K-Alv Retry: 3 [0~255:1]
0~255 Step 1
Default 3
Check the communication connecting maintainance status as much as the setting number. If there isnt a respond, take as communication fail and close the communication connection.
6.2.2.4. PORTF(232) Setup

Related elements in front panel of ETR300-R are set. Move to MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORTF (232) to select setting for PORTF. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORTF(232)/ Baud Rate
[PROTF(232)] >Baud Rate: 38400 [1200 ~ 115200 bps]
Range
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200bps Step ~
Default 38400 Select the baud rate for PORTF.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
83
6.2.3. Dialup Modem Setup

Place the curser on DIALUP MODEM in COMMUNICATION menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. ETR300-R supports a Hayes compatible Modem on Port 1(232) for remote dial up access using DNP3. For details, refer to DNP3 Protocol Technical Manual. DIAL MODEM 1 menu has the sub-menu as below.
[DIALUP MODEM 1] >1.CALLING STRING 2.CALLING NUMBER 3.INITIAL STRING 4.CONNECTION
6.2.3.1. Settup
Calling String In order to set Calling String, move to MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ DIAL MODEM1/ CALLING STRING GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CALLING STRING
[CALLING STRING] >CS: #### [! ~ z]
Range
ATD, ATDT, ATDP Step ~
Default ATD
Set to use Dial-Up modem use. Select a dial string one among them. ATD : Default Dial Type(Already set in modem(Default Dial type) ATDT : Tone Dial ATDP : Pulse Dial
Calling Number Move to MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ DIAL MODEM1/ CALLING NUMBER GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CALLING NUMBER
[CALLING NUMBER] >CN:0123456789XXXXXX [! ~ z]
Range
~ Step ~
Default ~
Insert call number to call to. [Modem(Master station) phone number]. Total 16 digits shall be used from the first digit space and empty space shall be filled up by X.
84
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Initial String Move to MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ DIAL MODEM1 / INITIAL STRING GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ INITIAL STRING
[INITIAL STRING] >IS: AT&C1 Q1 E0 M0 &D2 +CRM=129 [spase ~ z]
Range Default
~ AT&C1 Q1 E0 M0 &D2 +CRM=129 Step ~
Modem can be initialized by inserting total 30 figures of number, character, space or special character. ETR300-R should be reset before making a phone call(connection). NOTE : Continuous double Space or / shall ignore next String.
Connection Move to MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ DIAL MODEM1 / CONNECTION GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CONNECTION/ Cmd Res TO Range
[CONNECT PARAMETER] >Cmd Res TO: 2 >Connect TO: 30 >Idle Time: 60
Default 2
Setting the Command response waiting time. If there is no response from a modem during setting time, it is considered as a communication failure after the setting time and the status of modem failure is maintained.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CONNECTION/ Connect TO Range

Default 30
Setting the Modem connection waiting time. If there is no connection during setting time, it is considered as a connection failure after the setting time, the status of modem failure is maintained.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
85
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CONNECTION/ Idle Time Range

Default 60sec
Setting the Modem connection close time. During setting time, the connection is closed after the setting time.
6.2.4. Event & Etc Setup

Place the curser on EVENT&ETC in COMMUNICATIN menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. In this menu, sets the items used in common among the ETR300-R communication protocol setting items. Move to MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC SETUP to select setting for EVENT&ETC SETUP. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC SETUP/ AEvt Method
[EVENT&ETC SETUP] >AEvt Method: OFF AEvt Skip at Ft: NO [OFF/TH/DB/BOTH]
Range
OFF, TH, DB, BOTH Step ~
Default OFF Active: in DNP point map.
This setting value is applied only to the AI point with vitalized Event OFF : AI point event is not occurred. TH : Event is occurred when the AI point data is over or less than Threshold value. DB : AEvent is occurred when the AI data change value is over the Deadband value BOTH : TH and DB all used. Use the ETR300 interface program to setting the Event Active activation or desactivation of AI point, the Threshold value and Deadband value.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC SETUP / AEvt Skip at Ft

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] AEvt Method: OFF >AEvt Skip at Ft: NO [NO/YES]
Range
NO, YES Step ~
Default NO during Fault pickup.
Determine whether Threshold and Deadband AI event is generated
86
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC SETUP / Daily Max I

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] AEvt Skip at Ft: NO >Daily Max I:DISABLE [DISABLE/ENABLE]
Range
Default DISABLE transmission.
Select the [DISABLE/ENABLE] of Daily Maximum Load Current DISABLE : Do not process Daily Maximum Load Current Event.. ENABLE : Process Daily Maximum Load Current.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC SETUP / Flt I Evt

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] >Daily Max I:DISABLE >Flt I Evt: YES [NO/YES/1SHOT]
Range
NO, YES, 1SHOT Step ~
Default YES
NO : Do not send the all Fault Current Sequence to Event. YES : Send all Fault Current Sequence to Event. 1SHOT : Send the first Sequence Fault Current of Fault Sequence to Event. NOTE : The Fault Current occurrence time of each Sequence is when becomes no voltage after experience the Fault Current.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ Aver. Load Calc T

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Flt I Evt: YES >Aver.Load Calc T:15 >1~6/10/12/15/20/30m
Range
1/2/3/4/5/6/10/12/15/20/30 min Step ~
Default 15
Set the time interval for the calculation of average load current.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ BI Queue size

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] >BI Queue size: 256 BI Evt Mode: ALL >[32/64/128/256]
Range Default
32, 64, 128, 256 Applicable for lower than Ver 3.5 of ETR300-R : 32 Applicable for Ver 3.5 or higher of ETR300-R : 256
Set the binary queue size.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
87
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ BI Evt Mode

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] BI Queue size: 32 >BI Evt Mode: ALL >[ALL/LAST]
Range
ALL, LAST Step ~
Default ALL Set the binary event mode.
ALL : all status is buffed for same point. LAST : Only last event is buffed for same point. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ AI Queue size
[EVENT&ETC SETUP] >AI Queue size: 256 AI Evt Mode: ALL [32/64/128/256]
Range Default
Set the analog queue size.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ AI Evt Mode

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] AI Queue size: 32 >AI Evt Mode: ALL >[ALL/LAST]
Range
ALL, LAST Step ~
Default ALL Set the analog event mode.
ALL : all analog is buffed for same point. LAST : Only last event is buffed for same point. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ CI Queue size
[EVENT&ETC SETUP] >CI Queue size: 32 >CI Evt Mode: ALL [32/64/128/256]
Range Default
Set the counter queue size.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ CI Evt Mode

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] CI Queue size: 32 >CI Evt Mode: ALL >[ALL/LAST]
Range
ALL, LAST Step ~
Default ALL Set the counter event mode.
ALL : all counter is buffed for same point. LAST : Only last event is buffed for same point.
88
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ Time SynType

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] >Time SynType:LOCAL Time Tag Type:LOCAL [LOCAL/GMT]
Range
LOCAL, GMT Step ~
Default LOCAL Synching with the master station. NOTE :
Set Reference Time Type. It signifies the time data type when Time
This setting is set to be GMT and the setting values associated with GMT(in TIME ZONE menu) are set up incorrectly, the time internal clock in ETR300-R can be changed incorrectly at time synchronization.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ Time Tag Type

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Time SynType:LOCAL >Time Tag Type:LOCAL [LOCAL/GMT]
Range
LOCAL, GMT Step ~
Default LOCAL
Set the time type for event recorders in DNP Communication. NOTE : This setting is set to be GMT and the setting values associated with GMT(in TIME ZONE menu) are set up incorrectly, the time of event transmitted is not correct.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ CI Frz Period

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] >Time Tag Type:LOCAL >CI Frz Period: OFF >[OFF,1~60000m]
Range
OFF(0), 1 ~ 60000 min Step 1 min
Default OFF
Set the period to freez counter by itself. NOTE : 1. 2. In case ETR300 is the standard type, this setting shall be Ver 3.9 or higher of ETR300-R to be indicated. In case ETR300 is the External O/I option type, this setting shall be Ver 4.10 or higher of ETR300-R to be indicated.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
89
6.2.5. File Transfer Setup

In this menu, sets about the file transfer. These are applied equally to DNP3.0 SLAVE 1 and DNP3.0 SLAVE2 Protocol. Move to MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP FILE TREANSFER to select setting for file transfer. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP FILE TRANSFER / FTP Mode-R
[FTP FILE TRANSFER] >FTP Mode-R: DNP >FTP Mode-W: DNP [DNP,FTPC,FTPS,USER]
Range
DNP, FTPC, FTPS, USER Step ~
Default DNP Select the protocol for file transfer.
DNP: Read the file in DNP protocol method. FTPC : Read the file in FTP Client method. FTPS : Read the file in FTP Sever method. USER : Read the file in the users method. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP FILE TRANSFER / FTP Mode-W
[FTP FILE TRANSFER] >FTP Mode-R: DNP >FTP Mode-W: DNP [DNP,FTPC,FTPS,USER]
Range
DNP, FTPC, FTPS, USER Step ~
Default DNP Select the protocol for file transfer.
DNP: Write the file in DNP protocol method. FTPC : Write the file in FTP Client method. FTPS : Write the file in FTP Sever method. USER : Write the file in users method. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP FILE TRANSFER / FTP Dev
[FTP FILE TRANSFER] >FTP Dev: REC >FTD Dev.No: REC001 [space ~ Z]
Range
Space ~ Z Step ~
Default REC
Select the Device Type for FTP file classification..
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP FILE TRANSFER / FTP Dev.No

[FTP FILE TRANSFER] >FTP Dev: REC >FTD Dev.No: REC001 [space ~ Z]
Range
Space ~ Z Step ~
Default REC001
Select the Device Number for FTP file classification
90
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP FILE TRANSFER / FTP ID

[FTP FILE TRANSFER] >FTP ID: ENTEC >FTP PW: 1234 [space ~ Z]
Range
Space ~ Z Step ~
Default ENTEC
Set the ID of the device used for the connection with FTP.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP FILE TRANSFER / FTP PW

[FTP FILE TRANSFER] >FTP ID: ENTEC >FTP PW: 1234 [space ~ Z]
Range
Space ~ Z Step ~
Default 1234 Set the FTP connection password .
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP FILE TRANSFER / FTP Passive

[FTP FILE TRANSFER] >FTP PW: 1234 >FTP Passive:DISABLE [DISABLE/ENABLE]
Range
Default DISABLE Select the FTP connecting method.
If ENABLE is selected uses Passive method. If DISABLE is selected use Active method.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
91
6.3. Event Recorder

Place the curser on EVENT RECORDER in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Waveform and its related elements are set in this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / EVENT RECORDER / Wave Capture
[EVENT RECORDER] >Wave Capture: OFF >Wave S/R: 128 [OFF/ON]
Range
ON, OFF Step ~
Default ON Set whether to use Wave capture.
GLOBAL SETTING / EVENT RECORDER / Wave S/R

[EVENT RECORDER] Wave Capture: OFF >Wave S/R: 128 [16/32/64/128]
Range
16, 32, 64, 128 sample Step ~
Default 64 sample
Select a number of sampling for wave capture. Captured wave cycle is 20cycles if 128 sampling is applied. Captured wave cycle is 40cycles if 64 sampling is applied. Number of cycle varies on the number of sampling selection.
GLOBAL SETTING / EVENT RECORDER / Wave Pre-Cycle

[EVENT RECORDER] Wave S/R: 128 >Wave Pre-Cycle: 5 [1~5:1cycel]
Range
1 ~ 5 cycle Step 1 cycle
Default 5 occurring.
Pre-cycle is to record(capture) a number of wave cycle before trigger Pre-cycle changes depending on sampling ratio. For instance, if precycle is set for 5 cycle, when sampling number is 128, 5 cycle si applied, the sampling number is 68, pre-cycle is 10, 32 case, 20 precycle is applied.
92
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.4. Monitoring
Place the curser on MONITERING in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
[MONITERING] >1.SYNCHROCHECK 2.OPERATION COUNT 3.CONTACT WEAR 4.BATTERY TEST 5.PQM 6.TD MONITOR
6.4.1. Synchronism Check(25)

Place the curser on SYNCHROCHECK in NOMITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. ETR300-R provides the manual close for the synchronism check element that synchronism voltages are within the programmed differentials of voltage magnitude, phase angle position, and frequency. If this feature is enabled, the synchronism check will be performed before local/remote close with the exception of automatic reclose for fault. When either or both of the synchronism check voltages are de-energized, the synchronism check can allow for local/remote close. If ETR300-R is the type of CVD, the synchronism check voltage input VL is connected to load side(VR phase) in recloser. The other synchronizing phase can be connected for phase-neutral voltage Vr, Vs or Vt; for phase-phase voltages Vab or Vcb. on load side in recloser. The synchronism check element in the following settings should be enabled. GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / Function
[SYNCHROCHECK] >Function: OFF >D.V.Max: 0.50 [OFF/ON]
Range
OFF, ON Step ~
Default OFF
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = ON, the feature is operational.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
93
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / D.V.Max

[SYNCHROCHECK] Function: OFF >D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50 [0.00~1.25:0.01]
Range
0.00 ~ 1.25 Step 0.01pu
Default 0.50
Enter the dead line maximum voltage for synchronism check. Used to Prevent the synchronism check element for voltage below this level.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / L.V.Min

[SYNCHROCHECK] D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50 >L.V.Min(xVT): 0.85 [0.00~1.25:0.01]
Range
0.00 ~ 1.25 Step 0.01pu
Default 0.85
Enter the live line minimum voltage for synchronism check. Used to activate the synchronism check element for voltage over this level.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / M.V.D(V)

[SYNCHROCHECK] L.V.Min(xVT): 0.85 >M.V.D: 0.10 [0.00~1.25:0.01]
Range
0.00 ~ 1.25 Step 0.01pu
Default 0.10
Enter the maximum voltage difference of the synchronism voltages. A voltage magnitude differential of the two input voltages below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / M.A.D(Deg)

[SYNCHROCHECK] M.V.D(V): 0.10 >M.A.D(Deg): 15 [0(OFF),5~80:5deg]
Range
Applicable for lower than Ver 3.4 of ETR300-R : 0(OFF), 5~80 deg Applicable for Ver 3.4 or higher of ETR300-R : 1 ~ 100 deg Step 1 deg
Default 15
Enter the maximum angle difference of the synchronism voltages. An angular differential between the synchronism voltage angles below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism. GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / M.F.D(Hz)
[SYNCHROCHECK] >M.A.D(Deg): 15 >M.F.D(Hz): 2.00 [0.00~5.00:0.01Hz]
Range
0.00 ~ 5.00 Hz Step 0.01 Hz
Default 2.00
Enter the maximum frequency difference of the synchronism voltages. A frequency differential between the synchronism voltages below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.
94
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / Sync Phase

[SYNCHROCHECK] >M.F.D(Hz): 2.00 >Sync Phase: ALL [ALL/R(AB)/S(CB)/T]
Range
ALL, R(AB), S(CB), T(AC) Step ~
Default ALL
Select the synchronism check phase on load side.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / Time delay

[SYNCHROCHECK] >Sync Phase: ALL >Time : 1.0 [0.1~180.0:0.1s]
Range
0.0 ~ 180.0sec Step 0.1sec
Default 1.0
Set a delay time of synchronism check.
6.4.2. Operation Count

Place the curser on OPERATION COUN in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Recloser operation counter and monitoring elements are set in this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / OPERATION COUNT / Function
[OPERATION COUNT] >Function: OFF Limit: 10000 [OFF/ON]
Range
OFF, ON Step ~
Default OFF
Select whether to use Recloser operation count monitoring. If function is activated and operation counter is over Limit, Logic bit DIGTCNT is set. Logic bit can be used for Output or Alarm through Interface software.
Figure 6-1. DIGTCNT Diagram
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / OPERATION COUNT / Limit

[OPERATION COUNT] >Function: OFF >Limit: 10000 [1~20000:1]
Range
1 ~ 20000 Step 1
Default 10000
Set a number to alarm when Recloser operation number meets this set.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
95
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / OPERATION COUNT / Count set

[TRIP COUNTER] Limit: 10000 >Count set: 0 [0~10000:1]
Range
0 ~ 10000 Step 1
Default 0
It is to set the same operation number of circuit breaker. Set value is available after operation count is reset. Count reset refers to MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET / OPERATION COUNT or COUNT ALL
6.4.3. Contact Wear

Place the curser on CONTACT WEAR in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Recloser contact wear and monitoring elements are set in this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Function
[CONTACT WEAR] >Function: OFF Pickup(%): 20.0 [OFF/ON]
Range
OFF, ON Step ~
Default OFF
Select whether to use Recloser contact wear monitoring.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Pickup(%)

[CONTACT WEAR] >Function: OFF >Pickup(%): 20.0 [0.0~50.0:0.1%]
Range
0.0 ~ 50.0 % Step 0.1 %
Default 20.0 value.
Set a pickup value to alarm when recloser contact wear reaches set
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Rated Volt(kV)

[CONTACT WEAR] Pickup(%): 20.0 >Rated Volt(kV): 38 [15/27/38kV]
Range
15, 27, 38 Step ~
Default Note Set the power line nominal voltage.
NOTE : The power line nominal voltage determines the Recloser type.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Interrupt(kA)

[CONTACT WEAR] Rated Volt(kV): 15 >Interrupt(kA): 12.5 [5.0~50.0:0.1kA]
Range
5.0 ~ 50.0 kA Step 0.1 kA
Default 12.5
Enter the capacity of rated Interrupter.
96
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / No. Max I

[CONTACT WEAR] Interrupt(kA): 12.5 >No. Max I: 100 [1~999:1]
Range
1 ~ 999 Step 1
Default 100
Enter the capacity of rated Interrupter.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / A Wear Set

[CONTACT WEAR] >A Wear Set: 100.00 >B Wear Set: 100.00 [0.00~100.00:0.01%]
Range
0.00 ~ 100.00 % Step 0.01%
Default 100.00
It is to set Circuit breaker phase A contact wear value in ETR300-R. Set value is available after Contact Wear Rset. Contact wear reset refers to MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET / CONTACT WEAR.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / B Wear Set

[CONTACT WEAR] >A Wear Set: 100.00 >B Wear Set: 100.00 [0.00~100.00:0.01%]
Range
0.00 ~ 100.00 % Step 0.01%
Default 100.00
It is to set Circuit breaker phase B contact wear value in ETR300-R. Set value is available after Contact Wear Rset. Contact wear reset refers to MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET / CONTACT WEAR.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / C Wear Set

[CONTACT WEAR] >B Wear Set: 100.00 >C Wear Set: 100.00 [0.00~100.00:0.01%]
Range
0.00 ~ 100.00 % Step 0.01%
Default 100.00
It is to set Circuit breaker phase C contact wear value in ETR300-R. Set value is available after Contact Wear Rset. Contact wear reset refers to MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET / CONTACT WEAR.
6.4.4. Battery Test

Place the curser on BATTERY TEST in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / BATTERY TEST / Period
[BATTERY TEST] >Period: 24 [0(OFF),1~720:1hr]
Range
0(OFF), 1 ~ 720 hour Step 1 hour
Default 24
Set a time period for automatic battery test.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
97
6.4.5. Power Quality Monitoring

Place the curser on PQM in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Power Quality Monitoring elements are set in this menu and sub-menu is as below.
[PQM] >1.PQM FUNCTION 2.INTERRUPT 3.SAG 4.SWELL 5.HARMONICS 6.CURR UNBALANCE 7.VOLT UNBALANCE 8.UNDER VOLTAGE 9.OVER VOLTAGE 10.UNDER FREQUENCY 11.ITHD/UBI I LIMIT
PQM functions follows IEEE 1159 standard. IEEE 1159 standard determines under categorizing into several groups depending on electric fluctuation depending on size and continuous time. Voltage fluctuation and its categories are as shown in Ficture 6-2 . IEEE 1159 Voltage distortion summary.
Ficture 6-2. IEEE 1159 Voltage distortion summary All PQM function is calculated under 128 sampling.
98
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.4.5.1. PQM Function Place the curser on PQM FUNCTION in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / PQM FUNCTION / Function
[PQM FUNCTION] >Function: DISABLE [DISABLE/ENABLE]
Range
Default DISABLE Select whether to use PQM function.
If the function is disabled, all PQM monitor function is disabled. 6.4.5.2. Interrupt Place the curser on INTERRUPT in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / INTERRUPT / Level
[INTERRUPT] >Level: 0.30 >Time: 2.0 [0(OFF),0.10~0.49pu]
Range
0(OFF), 0.10 ~ 0.49 pu Step 0.01 pu
Default 0.10
It is to set Interrupt detect level for Power Quality. Detect level is set by multiplying selected value in here to source side rated voltage.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / INTERRUPT / Time

[INTERRUPT] >Level: 0.30 >Time: 2.0 [0.5~10.0:0.5cycle]
Range
0.5 ~ 10.0 cycle Step 0.5 cycle
Default 2.0 Set a interrupt detecting time.
6.4.5.3. Sag Place the curser on SAG in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / SAG / Level
[SAG] >Level: 0.90 >Time: 2.0 [0(OFF),0.50~0.99pu]
Range
0(OFF), 0.50 ~ 0.99 pu Step 0.01 pu
Default 0.90
Set a voltage sag(low voltage) for Power Quality. Detect level is set by multiplying a set value in here to source side rated voltage.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
99
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SAG / Time

[SAG] >Level: 0.90 >Time: 2.0 [0.5~10.0:0.5cycle]
Range
Default 2.0
Set a detect time for voltage sag(voltage low).
6.4.5.4. Swell Place the curser on SWELL in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / SWELL / Level
[SWELL] >Level: 1.20 >Time: 2.0 [0(OFF),1.01~1.50pu]
Range
0(OFF), 1.01 ~ 1.50 pu Step 0.01 pu
Default 1.20
Set a detect level of Voltage swell(high voltage) for Power Quality. Detect level is set by multiplying a set value in here to source side rated voltage.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SWELL / Time

[SWELL] >Level: 1.20 >Time: 2.0 [0.5~10.0:0.5cycle]
Range
Default 2.0 Set a time to detect voltage swell.
6.4.5.5. Harmonics Place the curser on HARMONIC in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / VTHD Pickup
[HARMONICS] >VTHD Pickup: OFF >VTHD Delay: 1.0 [0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]
Range
0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 % Step 0.1%
Default OFF
Set a detect level of voltage total harmonic distortion.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / VTHD Delay

[HARMONICS] >VTHD Pickup: OFF >VTHD Delay: 1.0 [0.2~60.0:0.1s]
Range
0.2 ~ 60.0 sec Step 0.1 sec
Default 1.0
Set a detect time to detect voltage total harmonic distortion.
100
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / ITHD Pickup

[HARMONICS] >ITHD Pickup: OFF >ITHD Delay: 0.5 [0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]
Range
0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 % Step 0.1%
Default OFF
Set a detect level of current total harmonic distortion.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / ITHD Delay

[HARMONICS] >ITHD Pickup: OFF >ITHD Delay: 1.0 [0.2~60.0:0.1s]
Range
0.2 ~ 60.0 sec Step 0.1 sec
Default 1.0
Set a detect time to detect current total harmonic distortion.
6.4.5.6. Current Unbalance Place the curser on CURR UNBALANCE in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / CURR UNBALANCE / Level
[CURR UNBALANCE] >Level: 30 >Time: 4.0 [0(OFF),1~100:1%]
Range
0(OFF), 1 ~ 100 % Step 1%
Default 30
Set a detect level of Current Unbalance for Power Quality. Unbalance current is calculated by following formula.
UI rate =
I2 100 I1
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CURR UNBALANCE / Time

[CURR UNBALANCE] >Level: 30 >Time: 4.0 [0.1~60.0:0.1s]
Range
0.1 ~ 60.0 sec Step 0.1 sec
Default 4.0
Set a detect time of current unbalance.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
101
6.4.5.7. Voltage Unbalance Place the curser on VOLTAGE UNBALANCE in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / VOLT UNBALANCE / Level
[VOLT UNBALANCE] >Level: 30 >Time: 4.0 [0(OFF),1~100:1%]
Range
0(OFF), 1 ~ 100 % Step 1%
Default 30
Set a detect level of Voltage Unbalance for Power Quality. Unbalance voltage is calculated by following formula.
UVrate =
V2 100 V1
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / VOLT UNBALANCE / Time

[VOLT UNBALANCE] >Level: 30 >Time: 4.0 [0.1~60.0:0.1s]
Range
0.1 ~ 60.0 sec Step 0.1 sec
Default 4.0
Set a detect time of voltage unbalance.
6.4.5.8. Under Voltage Place the curser on UNDER VOLTAGE in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE / Level
[UNDER VOLTAGE] >Level: 0.80 >Time: 4.0 [0(OFF),0.30~0.95pu]
Range
0(OFF), 0.30 ~ 0.95 pu Step 0.01 pu
Default 0.80
Set an under voltage detect level for power quality. Detect level is set by multiplying a set value in here to source side rated voltage.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / UNDER VOLTAGE / Time

[UNDER VOLTAGE] >Level: 0.80 >Time: 4.0 [0.0~180.0:0.1s]
Range
0.0 ~ 180.0 sec Step 0.1 sec
Default 4.0 Set an under voltage detecting time.
102
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.4.5.9. Over Voltage Place the curser on OVER VOLTAGE in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE / Level
[OVER VOLTAGE] >Level: 1.20 >Time: 4.0 [0(OFF),1.05~1.50pu]
Range
0(OFF), 1.05 ~ 1.50 pu Step 0.01 pu
Default 1.20
Set an over voltage detect level for power quality. Detect level is set by multiplying a set value in here to source side rated voltage.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / OVER VOLTAGE / Time

[OVER VOLTAGE] >Level: 0.80 >Time: 4.0 [0.0~180.0:0.1s]
Range
0.0 ~ 180.0 sec Step 0.1 sec
Default 4.0 Set an over voltage detecting time.
6.4.5.10.
Under Frequency
Place the curser on UNDER FRQUENCY in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER FREQUENCY / Level
[UNDER FREQUENCY] >Level: 59.80 >Time: 0.03 0(OFF),46.00~59.98Hz
Range
0(OFF), 46.00 ~ 59.98 Hz Step 0.01 Hz
Default 59.50*
Set an under frequency detect level for power quality. NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to the option type.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / UNDER FREQUENCY / Time

[UNDER FREQUENCY] >Level: 59.80 >Time: 0.03 [0.03~10.00:0.01s]
Range
0.03 ~ 10.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 3.00
Set an under frequency detecting time.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
103
6.4.5.11.
Current Unbalance/THD Detect Limit
Place the cursor on ITHD/UBI I LIMIT menu, press [ENT] key and move to this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / ITHD/UBI I LIMIT / Limit
[ITHD/UBI I LIMIT] >Limit: 60 [0~630:1A]
Range
0 ~ 630 A Step 1A
Default 60
Set the minimum current value to detect the current unbalance element and current harmonic distortion element. If load current is smaller this level, then current unbalance and current THD status point does not maked.
6.4.6. TD Monitor
Place the curser on TD MONITOR in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. It is to set Transducer to monitor DC Analog input. It has 5 channels of transducer, each transducer has 2 pickup setting values to detects the signal size of input, monitoring in 2 levels the input sinal which is over than pickup setting value and give the alarm. The no. 1 and 2 transducer can detect the battery and charger status by receiving the battery voltage and charge section voltage in input signal and sending to the controller. TD3 is reserved for Gas type tank. User can use TD4 and TD5, these channels are current type of 20mA rated current. Input value in Transducer can be checked in metering menu.
Table 6-3. TD and Terminal Relations TD TD1-1 TD1-2 TD2-1 TD3-1 TD4 TD5 Teminal(Input) Internal Battery Volt Internal Charger Volt DC1(Side Pannel) DC2(Side Pannel) DC3(Side Pannel) H/W Spec. 40V 40V 10V 20mA 20mA Purpose Battery bad detection Power down mode Charger bad detection Reserved(GAS) User Avaliable User Avaliable
104
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1 Rate

[TD MONITOR] >TD1 Rate: >TD1 Ratio: [1~200:1]
Range
40 1
1 ~ 200 Step 1
Default 40
Set Transducer 1(TD1) monitoring range.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1 Ratio

[TD MONITOR] >TD1 Rate: >TD1 Ratio: [1~3000:1]
Range
1 1
1 ~ 3000 Step 1
Default 1 Set Transducer 1(TD1) ratio.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1 Offset

[TD MONITOR] >TD1 Ratio: 1 >TD1 Offset: +0 [-10000 ~ +10000:1]
Range
-10000 ~ +10000 Step 1
Default 0 Set an Offset of Transducer 1(TD1).
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-1 Type

[TD MONITOR] >TD1-1 Type: UNDER >TD1-1 PU: 21.0 [UNDER/OVER]
Range
UNDER, OVER Step ~
Default UNDER
Set Transducer 1(TD1) Under or Over. Under setting provides pickup and alarm when it senses under the pickup value. Over setting provides pickup and alarm when it senses over the pickup value.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-1 PU

[TD MONITOR] >TD1-1 PU: 21.0 >TD1-1 Delay: 2.00 0(OFF),0~6000.0:0.1
Range
0(OFF), 0 ~ 6000.0 Step 0.1
Default 21.0 Set TD1 pickup value.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-1 Delay

[TD MONITOR] >TD1-1 PU: OFF >TD1-1 Delay: 2.00 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 2.00 Set a delay time of TD1.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
105
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-2 Type

[TD MONITOR] >TD1-2 Type: UNDER >TD1-2 PU: 19.0 [UNDER/OVER]
Range
UNDER, OVER Step ~
Default UNDER Set 2nd monitoring element of TD1.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-2 PU

[TD MONITOR] >TD1-2 PU: 19.0 >TD1-2 Delay: 2.00 0(OFF),0~6000.0:0.1
Range
nd
0(OFF), 0 ~ 6000.0 Step 0.1
Default 19.0* Set 2 pickup value of TD1.
NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to the option type.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-2 Delay

[TD MONITOR] >TD1-2 PU: OFF >TD1-2 Delay: 2.00 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 2.00 Set 2nd delay time of TD1.
. NOTE : TD2 ~ TD5, the same as TD1 above.
106
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.4.7. Fault Locator

The fault locator calculates the distance to the fault. When fault occurs the magnitude and the phase of voltage and current are varied, and then fault type(phase to ground, (phase to phase to ground), phase to phase, three phase) can be determined by the analysis of these variations, and fault distance can be calculated by the estimation of the apparent impedance. This calculation is based on the assumptions that the feeder positive and zero sequence impedance are a constant per unit distance and fault impedance is composed of pure resistance. In calculating, errors could be introduced by several reasons(fault resistance etc.), the major error due to fault resistance can be reduced by comparing the prefault current and voltage to the fault current and voltage. For more accurate calculation, the prefault data is required at least 2 cycles, and the after fault data is required at least 2 cycles. If the line impedance per unit and total length were known, the fault distance can be easily achieved, but source impedance is not required. Fault data may not be accurate for a close-into-fault condition where there is no prefault power flow. In case of closing, during a reclose sequence, the apparent distance of the first fault is very useful. The algorithm for the fault locator is most applicable to a radial three-phase feeder. Faulted distribution system is considered as following simplified Figure 6-3. Faulted distribution system circuit for example.
mZ
(1-m)Z
IA VA
IF RF
L O A D
Ficture 6-3. Faulted distribution system circuit The calculated Fault Location can be checked on the Fault Cycle event menu. For more details, refer to 8.3. Fault Cycle - Summary. NOTE : Fault Locator function is supported from version 3.80 of ETR300-R.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
107
The fault locator settings are as follows ; GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Function
[FAULT LOCATOR] >Function : OFF Length(km) : 50.0 [OFF/ON]
Range
OFF, ON Step ~
Default OFF
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = ON, the feature is operational.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Feeder Length

[FAULT LOCATOR] Function : OFF >Length(km) : 50.0 [0.1~99.9:0.1km]
Range
0.1 ~ 99.9 km Step 0.1 km
Default 50.0
Enter the total length of the feeder in kilometers
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z1-Resistive

[FAULT LOCATOR] >Length(km) : 50.0 >Z1(RES) : 10.0 [0.1~6000.0:0.1]
Range
0.1 ~ 6000.0 Step 0.1
Default 10.0 impedance, in actual ohms.
Enter the total real components of the feeder positive sequence
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z1-Inductive

[FAULT LOCATOR] >Z1(RES) : 10.0 >Z1(IND) : 10.0 [0.1~6000.0:0.1]
Range
0.1 ~ 6000.0 Step 0.1
Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder positive sequence
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z0-Resistive

[FAULT LOCATOR] >Z1(IND) : 10.0 >Z0(RES) : 10.0 [0.1~6000.0:0.1]
Range
0.1 ~ 6000.0 Step 0.1
Default 10.0 in actual ohms.
Enter the total real components of the feeder zero sequence impedance,
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z0-Inductive

[FAULT LOCATOR] >Z0(RES) : 10.0 >Z0(IND) : 10.0 [0.1~6000.0:0.1]
Range
0.1 ~ 6000.0 Step 0.1
Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder zero sequence
108
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.5. Loop Control

The purpose of using LOOP CONTROL is to isolate a fault area and protect the normal operation area by coordinating with C/B or Recloser when a fault occurs. Loop control is able to provide automation system with using Sectionalizing Recloser, MID point Recloser, TIE point Recloser. Loop control is performed by voltage sensing of DV(Dead Line Voltage), LV(Live Line Voltage). Sectionalizing Recloser(SEC) When a fault is occurred from the source side of Sectionalizing Recloser and backup C/B operates, the line becomes DV and if it continues, it is figured as a permanent fault. Hence, Sectionalizing Recloser is opened. After Sectionalizing Recloser is opened and TIEpoint Recloser is closed, the current flows in opposite way. Therefore, the load side of Sectionalizing Recloser can keep the live line. When Load side of Sectionalizing Recloser has a fault, OCR Function is operated and the load side is disconnected. MIDpoint Recloser(MID) When a fault is occurred in the source side of MIDpoint Recloser and backup C/B or Sectionalizing Recloser operates, the line becomes DV status and if it continues, it is figured as a permanent fault, then automatically the setting is changed to Alternate setting. After changed to Alternate setting, when TIEpoint Recloser is closed, the current flows in opposite way. During TIEpoint Recloser closed, when a fault occurs, MIDpoint Recloser trips once and lockouts. After recovering the fault, connect C/B and when the line becomes LV, the setting is automatically changed to Primary setting and MIDpoint Recloser is closed. When Load side of MIDpoint Recloser gets a fault, OCR Function is operated and disconnects the load side. TIEpoint Recloser (TIE) TIEpoint Recloser automatically closes when either Source side or Load side becomes DV. When a fault occurs during automatic closing, the recloser trips once and lockouts. TIEpoint recloser automatically opens when loop control operates automatic closing at both side and when both side becomes DV.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
109
LCD Initial Screen Recloser type that is selected in Loop control, is displayed on LCD Initial Screen. Press [ENT] KEY to check operation status on the Initial Screen to see loop control mode. LOOP CONTROL: [SEC] , [MID], [TIE] Display a selected type. VS: [DV], [LV] Display Source side voltage of Recloser either Dead line voltage or Live line voltage. VL: [DV], [LV]
LOOP CONTROL [TIE] VS-[DV] VSDLT-[ - ] VL-[DV] VLDLT-[ - ] AUTO RESTORE T [ - ]
Display Load side voltage of Recloser either Dead line voltage or Live line voltage. VSDLT: [ - ], [RUN] Displays loop control function is operating due to the dead line voltage of Reclosers Source side. VLDLT: [ - ], [RUN] Displays loop control function is operating due to the dead line voltage of Reclosers Load side. AUTO RESTORE T: [ - ], [RUN] Displays Restoring status after Loop control operation.
LOOP CONTROL KEY Use LOOP CONTROL KEY to use Loop control on User interface Panel. LOOP CONTROL ENABLED Enable/Disables Loop control function. Lamp is on when Loop control function is Enabled. SEC, MID can be selected on CLOSE status and TIE can be selected on OPEN status. LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE Ficture 6-4. Loop Control Key Enable/Disables Auto restoration function of SEC, MID. Lamp is on when Auto restoration function is enabled. Auto restoration function is, after loop control operation, Auto Rest T timer operates till timeout, and restores the preset values.
110
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.5.1. Setting
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL /
[LOOP CONTROL] >Type Select : NONE >VRS to S/M : VS >VRS to Tie : VS >VS Wire: 3PN >VL Wire: 3PN >CAS to Mid: OFF >CAS to Tie: OFF >LC After Cl:DISABLE >LC After Op:DISABLE >OT Both DB: 5.00 >AR Time: 5.00 >DLV Max(%): 20.0 >LLV Min(%): 70.0 >DLPT Delay: 60.00 >LLPT Delay: 10.00 >DLRT Delay: 5.00 >NRT After LA: 15.00
LOOP CONTROL SUB SETUP MENU Place the curser on LOOP CONTROL, in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / Type Select

[LOOP CONTROL] >Type Select : NONE >VRS to S/M : VS [NONE/SEC/MID/TIE]
Range
NONE, SEC, MID, TIE Step ~
Default NONE
Set whether to use Recloser type and loop control function. After setting this, press [LOOP CONTROL ENABLED] button (lamp ON) to operate this function. NONE : Loop control is not in use. SEC : It is used for SECtionalizing recloser. MID : It is used for MIDpoint. TIE : It is used for TIEpoint.
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / VRS to S/M

[LOOP CONTROL] >VRS to S/M : VS >VRS to Tie : VS [VS/VL]
Range
VS, VL Step ~
Default VS in SEC, MID.
Voltage Response Side to SEC&MID : The setting values are used Recloser operates upon selected side of voltage sensing. Select the Voltage response side when Recloser type is SEC & MID VS : Reclosers Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage VL : Reclosers Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
111
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / VRS to Tie

[LOOP CONTROL] >VRS to S/M : VS >VRS to Tie : VS [VS/VL/VS&VL]
Range
VS, VL, VS&VL Step ~
Default VS
Voltage Response Side to Tie : The setting value is used in TIE. TIE operates upon selected side of voltage sensing. VS : Reclosers Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage VL : Reclosers Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage VS&VL : Loop control operates one of either Source side or load side voltage becomes dead line voltage
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / VS wire

[LOOP CONTROL] >VS Wire: 3PN >VL Wire: 3PN [Combination of ABC]
Range Default
3PN,3PP,1PN(A),1PN(B),1PN(C),1PP(AB),1PP(BC),1PP(CA) 3PN Step ~
Line VS Wire : Select Reclosers Source side(A,B,C phase) voltage sensor(CVD or VT) connection type. Selected phase is used to figure dead/live line voltage. CVD type Control measures A, B, C phase voltage. 3PN : 3 Phase-Neutral 3PP : 3 Phase-Phase 1PN(A) : Phase A-Neutral 1PN(B) : Phase B-Neutral 1PN(C) : Phase C-Neutral 1PP(AB) : Phase A-Phase B 1PP(BC) : Phase B-Phase C 1PP(CA) : Phase C-Phase A
112
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / VL wire

[LOOP CONTROL] >VS Wire: 3PN >VL Wire: 3PN [Combination of ABC]
Range
3PN,3PP,1PN(A),1PN(B),1PN(C),1PP(AB),1PP(BC),1PP(CA) Step ~
Default 3PN
Line VL Wire : Select Recloser Load side(R,S,T phase) voltage sensor(CVD or VT) connection type. Selected phase is used to figure dead/live line voltage. Select 1PN(A) to measure R phase voltage for CVD type Control S,T phase are not measured. 3PN : 3 Phase-Neutral 3PP : 3 Phase-Phase 1PN(A) : Phase A-Neutral 1PN(B) : Phase B-Neutral 1PN(C) : Phase C-Neutral 1PP(AB) : Phase A-Phase B 1PP(BC) : Phase B-Phase C 1PP(CA) : Phase C-Phase A
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / CAS to Mid

[LOOP CONTROL] >CAS to Mid: OFF >CAS to Tie: OFF [OFF/ON]
Range
OFF, ON Step ~
Default OFF
Change Alternate Setting at Mid Point : Select whether to use automatic setting change in MID type. DV status is remained for LLPT Delay time, setting group changes from Primary setting group to Alternate setting group. To use this function, Loop control setting shall be the same in Primary and Alternate setting group. OFF : Turn off auto change. ON : Turn on auto change.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
113
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / CAS to Tie

[LOOP CONTROL] >CAS to Mid: OFF >CAS to Tie: OFF [OFF/VS/VL/BOTH]
Range
OFF, VS, VL, BOTH Step ~
Default OFF
Change Alternate Setting at Tie Point : Set value is used in TIE. Select if Primary setting is automatically changed to Alternate setting, after set time(LL Regain T). To use this function, Loop control(setting value) of Primary and Alternate shall be set as the same. OFF : Turn off auto change. ON(VS) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VS. ON(VL) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VL. ON(BOTH) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VS or VL.
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / LC After Cl

[LOOP CONTROL] >LC After Cl:DISABLE >LC After Op:DISABLE [DISABLE/ENABLE]
Range
Default DISABLE
Select After Manual Close : Setting value is used in SEC. To select Loop Control automatically enable after recloser is closed by Manual operation. Manual close is referred when the operation signal is coming from remote or local. When Loop control function is enabled, PROGRAM 1 LED on User interface panel is turned on. DISABLE : After Manual close, Loop control function is not automatically activated.(Use PROGRAM 1 to activate it) ENABLE : After Manual close, Loop control function is automatically activated.
114
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / LC After Op

[LOOP CONTROL] >LC After Cl:DISABLE >LC After Op:DISABLE [DISABLE/ENABLE]
Range
Default DISABLE
Select After Manual Open : It is applicable to TIE type Recloser. It is to operate Loop control function automatically when recloser is manually opened by locally or remotely. When loop control function is available, the user interface panel LOOP CONTROL ENABLED LED is ON. DISABLE : After manual closing, loop control function does not operate. ([LOOP CONTROL ENABLED] button shall be pressed.) ENABLE : After manual closing, loop control function is automatically operated.
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / OT Both DB

[LOOP CONTROL] >OT Both DB: 5.00 >AR Time: 5.00 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 5.00
Open Time on Both Dead Bus : Setting value is used in TIE. After TIE closed, source and load sides become dead line for a certain period, TIE opens by Loop control.
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / AR Time

[LOOP CONTROL] >OT Both DB: 5.00 >AR Time: 5.00 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 5.00
Auto Restoration Time : Setting value is used in SEC, MID. This is active when Program 2 on User Interface Panel is enable. SEC operates Loop control(Automatic Open) if a voltage selected from VRS S/M becomes dead line. After opened, the voltage becomes Live Line, a certain period later, restores (Automatic Close). MID, if a voltage selected form VRS S/M becomes dead line, and when Loop control(Chg Alt-Tie is on, it automatically changes to Alternate Setting. Due to loop control operation, even if TIE recloser is closed and back to live line, MID will trip and lockout if the fault is not cleared. After clearing the fault and live line comes back, it is returned.(Automatically closed and changes to Primary setting)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
115
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / DLV Max(%)

[LOOP CONTROL] >DLV Max(%): 50.0 >LLV Min(%): 70.0 [20.0~70.0:0.1%]
Range
20.0 ~ 70.0 % Step 0.1 %
Default 20.0
Dead Bus Maximum Voltage(%) : Sense Dead Line Voltage. In Live Line, when a voltage is decreased below a set value, it determines Dead Line. In Source side, it is figured from a selected phase from VS Wire. In Load side, it is figured from a selected phase from VL Wire.
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / LLV Min(%)

[LOOP CONTROL] >DLV Max(%): 50.0 >LLV Min(%): 70.0 [50.0~85.0:0.1%]
Range
50.0 ~ 85.0 % Step 0.1 %
Default 70.0
Live Bus Minimum Voltage(%) : Sense Live Line Voltage. In Dead Line, when a voltage is increased over a set value, it determines Live Line. In Source side, it is figured form a selected phase from VS Wire, In Load side, it is figured from a selected phase from VL Wire.
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / DLPT Delay

[LOOP CONTROL] >DLPT Delay: 60.0 >LLPT Delay: 10.00 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 60.00
Dead Bus Pickup Time Delay : During DL Pickup T, the line becomes Dead Line and LL Regain T Timer shall be operated so that SEC, MID, TIE can operate. DL Pickup T Timer is the Cumulative Timer to count Dead Line time while C/B or Recloser is doing re-close operation. Timer is not reset regardless of Live Line and it is reset by DL rest T Timer. Setting shall be the same or bigger than the sum of C/B or reclosers reclosing time.
116
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / LLPT Delay

[LOOP CONTROL] >DLPT Delay: 50.0 >LLPT Delay: 10.00 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 10.00
Live Bus Pickup Time Delay : DL Pickup T shall be finished and during reset time, the line shall not be Live Line. SEC time setting (LLPT Delay) shall be more than 5 sec longer than MID time setting for operation coordination. After set time, SEC is opened, MID changes setting from Primary to Alternate (CAS to Mid shall be ON). TIE changes setting group from Primary to Alternate and automatically closed(CLOSE operation)
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / DBRT Delay

[LOOP CONTROL] >DLRT Delay: 5.00 >NRT After LA: 15.00 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 5.00
Dead Bus Reset Time Delay : It is a delay timer to reset accumulated time from DL Pickup T. This timer operates when DL Pickup T is set and the line becomes Live line.
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / NRT After LA

[LOOP CONTROL] >DLRT Delay: 5.00 >NRT After LA: 15.00 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 15.00 MID, TIE.
Non Reclose Time After LC Action : Setting values are used in This timer prevents from Reclosing when recloser operates due to a fault after Loop control. After LL Regain T and changed Settings, while backward distributing line operating, if a fault occurs and MID trips within a set time, MID reclose. MID trips once and lockouts. If a fault occurs and MID trips after a set time, reclosing is executed. After LL Regain T, when a fault occurs and TIE trips within a set time, TIE also, trips once and lockout. If a fault occurs and TIE trips after a set time, reclosing is executed.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
117
6.5.2. Loop Control Logic Diagram
Ficture 6-5. Sectionalizing Recloser Logic
118
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Ficture 6-6. MID Point Recloser Logic
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
119
Ficture 6-7. TIE Point Recloser Logic
120
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.5.3. Loop Control Application

6.5.3.1. 5-Reclosers Loop Control For five reclosers loop control, it consists of 2 sets of SEC(Sectionalizing Recloser), 2 sets of MID(MIDpoint Reclosers) and 1 set of TIE(TIEpoint Recloser). Setting is in-turn form Source side to SEC-MID-TIE. In Table 6-4. 5-Reclosers Setting, the source side bushings of RC1, RC2, RC3 are installed for CB1 side. And the source side bushings of RC4, RC5 are installed for CB2 side. Table 6-4. 5-Reclosers Setting
SETTING Type Select VRS S/M VRS Tie VS Wire VL Wire Cng Alt-Mid Cng Alt-Tie LC After Cl LC After Op OT Both DL Auto Rest T DL V Max(%) LL V Min(%) DL Pickup T LL Regain T DL Reset T NRT After LC PROGRAM 1 PROGRAM 2 Reclose Time CB1 RC1 SEC RC2 MID RC3 TIE X VS&VL 3PN 1PN(A) X ON X ENABLE 10.00 5.00 50.0 70.0 22.0 15.00 5.00 10.00 ENABLE X RC4 MID RC5 SEC CB2 -

VS

VS

VS

VS
X 3PN 1PN(A) X X ENABLE X 5.00 50.0 70.0 22.0 5.00 5.00 X ENABLE ENABLE
X 3PN 1PN(A) ON X ENABLE X X 5.00 50.0 70.0 22.0 10.00 5.00 10.00 ENABLE ENABLE
X 3PN 1PN(A) ON X ENABLE X X 5.00 50.0 70.0 22.0 10.00 5.00 10.00 ENABLE ENABLE
2sec-1st reclose, 5sec-2nd reclose, 15sec-3rd reclose (lockout) X is not used.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
121
5-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault
Ficture 6-8. 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F1 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F1, CB1 operates reclosing sequence and then Trip Lockouts. During CB1 operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time becomes DL Pick T. When a line is Dead Line, LL Regain T operates. DL Pick T is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment. SEC, MID, TIE has the same setting time. Step2 : LL Regain T is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time, SEC(RC1), MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) operate. To operate LL Regain T from SECMIDTIE in turn, MID shall have longer time set than SEC, TIE shall have longer time set than MID. When LL Regain T is enable, SEC(RC1) is opened automatically, MID(RC2) changes to Alternate setting. Step3 : When LL Regain T is finished, TIE(RC3) changes to Alternate setting automatically, and then automatically close. F1 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward distributing line. Step4 : After removing a Fault, close CB1, then, SEC(RC1) automatically close after AutoRestoration Time. Step5 : Manually open TIE(RC3), change MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) setting to Primary setting. Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3) to recover the line as previous normal line.
122
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Ficture 6-9. 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F2 Fault Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F2, SEC(RC1) operate reclosing sequence and tirp lockout. During SEC(RC1) operation, accumulate Dead line time, and the accumulated Dead line time becomes DL Pick T. When the line is Dead Line, LL Regain T operates. DL Pick T is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment. MID, TIE point recloser has the same setting time. Step2 : LL Regain T is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time, MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) operate. To operate LL Regain T from MIDTIE in turn, TIE shall have longer time set than MID. When LL Regain T is enable, MID(RC2) changes to Alternate setting automatically. Step3 : When LL Regain T is finished, TIE(RC3) automatically close after changing to Alternate setting. Step4 : When closing TIE(RC3), MID(RC2) trip once and lockout because of F2 fault. F2 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward distributing line. Step5 : After removing a Fault, close SEC(RC1), then, MID(RC3) automatically changes to Alternate setting after Auto Restoration Time. Step6 : Manually open TIE(RC3) and change to Primary setting. Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3) to recover the line as previous normal line.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
123
Ficture 6-10. 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F2 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F3, MID(RC2) operate reclosing sequence and tirp lockout. During MID(RC2) operation, accumulate Dead line time, and the accumulated Dead line time becomes DL Pick T. When the line is Dead Line, LL Regain T operates. DL Pick T is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment. Step2 : LL Regain T is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time, TIE(RC3) operate. When LL Regain T is enable, TIE(RC3) changes to Alternate setting automatically. Step3 : When closing TIE(RC3), TIE(RC3) trip once and lockout because of F3 fault. F3 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward distributing line. Step4 : After removing the fault, close MID(RC3) Step5 : Manually open TIE(RC3) and change to Primary setting. Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3), and recover the previous the line as the previous normal line.
124
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.5.3.2. 3-Reclosers Loop Control For three - reclosers loop control, it consists of 2 sets of SEC(Sectionalizing Recloser), 1 set of TIE(TIEpoint Recloser). Setting is in-turn form Source side to SEC and to TIE. In Table 6-5. 3-Reclosers Setting, the source side bushings of RC1, RC2 are installed for CB1 side. And the source side bushings of RC3 is installed for CB2 side. Table 6-5. 3-Reclosers Setting
SETTING Type Select VRS S/M VRS Tie VS Wire VL Wire Cng Alt-Mid Cng Alt-Tie LC After Cl LC After Op OT Both DL Auto Rest T DL V Max(%) LL V Min(%) DL Pickup T LL Regain T DL Reset T NRT After LC PROGRAM 1 PROGRAM 2 Reclose Time CB1 RC1 SEC
VS
RC2 TIE X VS&VL 3PN 1PN(A) X ON X ENABLE 10.00 5.00 50.0 70.0 22.0 10.00 5.00 10.00 ENABLE X
RC3 SEC
VS
CB2 -
2sec-1st reclose, 5sec-2nd reclose, 15sec-3rd reclose (lockout) X is not used.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
125
Ficture 6-11. 3-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F1, CB1 operates reclosing sequence and then Trip Lockouts. During CB1 operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time becomes DL Pick T. When a line is Dead Line, LL Regain T operates. DL Pick T is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment. SEC, TIE has the same setting time. Step2 : LL Regain T is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time, SEC(RC1), TIE(RC2) operate. To operate LL Regain T from SECTIE in turn, TIE shall have longer time set than SEC. When LL Regain T is finished, SEC(RC1) is opened automatically, TIE(RC2) automatically changes to Alternate setting and close. F1 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward distributing line. Step3 : After removing the fault, close CB1, SEC(RC1) is automatically closed after Auto Restoration Time. Step4 : Manually open TIE(RC2) and change to Primary setting. Enable Loop control of TIE(RC2) and recover the line as the previous normal line.
126
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Ficture 6-12. 3-Reclosers Loop control at F2 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F2, SEC(RC1) operates reclosing sequence and then Trip Lockouts. During SEC(RC1) operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time becomes DL Pick T. When a line is Dead Line, LL Regain T operates. Step2 : LL Regain T is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time, TIE(RC2) automatically changes to Alternate setting and close. When closing TIE(RC2), TIE(RC2) trip once and lockouts because of F2. Step3 : After removing the fault, close SEC(RC1). Step4 : Manually open TIE(RC2) and change to Primary setting. Enable Loop control of TIE(RC2) and recover the line as the previous normal line.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
127
6.6. Passcode
Place the curser on PASSCODE in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Passcord can be changed in this menu. There are Passcord 1 and Passcord2. Passcord 1 is used for setting change of Global Setting, Group Setting and Passcord 2 is used for setting change of Communication. The passcord change procedure of both passcord is same. The procedure is same as below. MAIN MANU\ PASSCORD\ PASSCORD1 or 2
ENTER PASSCORD 0000
In the screen , press the present password.. 1) Use [], [] key to change the number and [ENT] or [] key to move to the next space .
[PASSCODE1] NEW PASSCORD 0000
2) Press [ENT] key after setting the 4 passcord. In screen , enter the new passcord with the same above method.
[PASSCODE1] NEW PASSCORD 0000 PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE
To save the new passcord, press [ENT] key in screen . When the changed password is saved, the screen is displayed. If the password entered in screen doesnt coincide, screen is displayed and move to screen . If press [FUN] or [ESC] key in screen after passcord change, screen is displayed and the changed passcord is not saved.
[PASSCODE1] NEW PASSWORD 0000 PASSCODE SAVED:0000
ENTER PASSCORD1 INVALID
[PASSCODE1] NEW PASSWORD 0000 PASSCODE NO CHANGE!
128
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.7. PLC
Place the curser on PLC in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
[PLC] >1.COMMON 2.DI/DO
6.7.1. COMMON
Place the curser on 1. COMMON in PLC menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
[OMMON] >1.LOGIC TIMER 2.PULSE TIMER 3.PULSE COUNTER
6.7.1.1. Logic Timer Place the curser on LOGIC TIMER in COMMON menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. PLC has 16 logic timer. If Input A is occurred in logic timer, X time later, output B becomes 1. If input A is disappeared, Y time later, output B becomes 0. Please refer to Fgure 6-12. Logic Timer symbol. X is Pick-up timer, Y is Dropout timer. In PLC, A shall be input at the user logic ITM. In PLC, B is output for TM.
TM X Y 0s/0s
Figure 6-13. Logic Timer Symbol
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
129
GLOBAL SETTING / PLC / COMMON / LOGIC TIMER / TM1-PU

[LOGIC TIMER] >TM1-PU: 0.05 TM1-DO: 0.05 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 0.05 Set a pickup time of Logic timer 1.
GLOBAL SETTING / PLC / COMMON / LOGIC TIMER / TM1-DO

[LOGIC TIMER] >TM1-PU: 0.05 >TM1-DO: 0.05 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 0.05
Set a Dropout Time of Logic timer 1. . NOTE : TM2 ~ TM16, the same as above. 6.7.1.2. Pulse Timer Place the curser on PULSE TIMER in COMMON menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. PLC has 16 pulse timer. When Input A becomes 1 in pulse timer, output B becomes 1, this output comes for Y time. Please refer to Figure 6-13. Pulse Timer Symbol In PLC, A shall be input at the user logic IPTM. In PLC, B is output for PTM.
PTM A Y 0s
Figure 6-14. Pulse Timer Symbol GLOBAL SETTING / PLC / COMMON / PULSE TIMER / PTM1
[PULSE TIMER] >PTM1 : 0.01 PTM2 : 0.01 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.01 ~ 600.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 0.01 Set a output time of pulse timer 1.
. NOTE : PTM2 ~ PTM16, the same as above.
130
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.7.1.3. Pulse Counter Place the curser on PULSE COUNTER in COMMON menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. PLC has 16 pulse counter. Whenever Input B becomes 0 and Input A becomes 1, the pulse counter increases and, it reaches to set number X, output C becomes 1. If Input B becomes 1, Output C becomes 0 and increased count becomes 0. Please refer to Fgure 6-14. Pulse Counter Symbol. In PLC, A shall be input at user logic CLSET. In PLC, B shall be input at user logic CLRST. In PLC, C is output for CLT
CLT PC
A B R
X 0
Figure 6-15. Pulse Counter Symbol GLOBAL SETTING / PLC / COMMON / PULSE COUNTER / PC1
[PULSE TIMER] >PC1 : 1 PC2 : 1 [1~60000:1]
Range
1 ~ 60000 Step 1
Default 1
Set output count value of Pulse counter 1(PC1).
. NOTE : PC2 ~ PC16, the same as above.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
131
6.7.2. DI/DO
Place the curser on DI/DO in PLC menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
[DI/DO] >1.INPUT DEBOUNCE 2.OUTPUT PULSE TIME
6.7.2.1. Input Debounce Timer Place the curser on INPUT DEBOUNCE in DI/DO menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Input debounce timer is individually prepared in Control Input. Input debounce timer sets a time to remove Chattering of INPUT signal. In Input debounce timer, if Input A becomes 1, X time later, Output B becomes 1. If Input A is disappeared, X time later, Output B becomes 0. Please refer to Figure 6-15. Input Debounce Timer Symbol. In PLC, A is IN101~IN of Control Input, B is output for IN.
IN X X 0s
Figure 6-16. Input Debounce Timer Symbol GLOBAL SETTING / PLC / DI/DO / INPUT DEBOUNCE / IN101
[INPUT DEBOUNCE] >IN101 : 0.020 IN102 : 0.020 0.005~10.000:0.001s
Range
0.005 ~ 10.000 sec Step 0.001 sec
Default 0.020
Set an Input Debounce Time of IN101.
. NOTE ) IN102 ~ IN108 and IN201 ~ IN208, the same as above. Applicable for Ver 4.00 or higher of ETR300-R, IN301 ~ IN312 setting items are indicated and the setting range is the same as above. In fact, even though I/O unit ETIO10 is installed, if EX-IO? setting is set with "NO" in GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / H/W OPTION menu, external I/O unit ETIO10 is not able to be used.
132
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.7.2.2. Output Pulse Timer Place the curser on OUTPUT PULSE TIME in DI/DO menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Output Pulse Timer has Control Output individually. In output pulse timer, Input B is 0 and, depending on Input A, Output C becomes 1. When Input A becomes 1, Output C becomes 1 for Y time. However, if Y time is set for 0, depending on Input A, corresponding coincidently and if A is 1, C becomes 1, and if A becomes 0 then, C becomes 0 as buffer. Please refer to Figure 6-16. Output Pulse Timer Symbol. In PLC, A shall be input at user logic IOUT. In PLC, B shall be input at user logic BOUT. In PLC, C is output for OUT and this output operates RELAY.
OUT A B R 0s
Figure 6-17. Output Pulse Timer Symbol GLOBAL SETTING / PLC / DI/DO / OUTPUT PULSE TIME / OUT101
[OUTPUT PULSE TIME] >OUT101 : 0.01 OUT102 : 0.01 0(BUFF),0.01~100.00s
Range
0(BUFF), 0.01 ~ 100.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default BUFF
Set an Output pulse time of OUT101.
. NOTE ) OUT102 ~ OUT108 and OUT201 ~ OUT208, the same as above. Applicable for Ver 4.00 or higher of ETR300-R, OUT301 ~ OUT308 setting items are indicated and the setting range is the same as above. In fact, even though I/O unit ETIO10 is installed, if EX-IO? setting is set with "NO" in GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / H/W OPTION menu, external I/O unit ETIO10 is not able to be used.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
133
6.7.3. PLC Setting Example

The user can use the inner timer and counter used for PLC setting and the EVENTs that occur within to logically map out for easier control of input/output. For operators used in logical mapping, refer to Table 6-6. Operator Symbols. Table 6-6. Operator Symbols OPERATOR DESCRIPTION AND - when all the inputs are 1, the output is 1.
OR when one of the inputs is 1, the output is 1..
! ( 1 0 )
-
NOT when the input is 1, the output is 0. This operation is performed first. When outputting directly, the output is 1. When outputting directly, the output is 0. Buffer output.
PLC logic setting example is as follows; If user wants pulse signal output at OUT101 port during Time Over Current(Fast/Delay) fault occurrence, set the PLC logic as the formula below.
Example: Logical Expression:

1) ITM01 = Y51P1T+Y51P2T+Y51G1T+Y51G2T+Y51N1T+Y51N2T+Y51Q1T+Y51Q2T When any one of the following : Phase, Ground, S.E.F or NEQ Time Over Current(Fast/Delay) fault occurs, Logic Timer 01(TM01) is outputted. The Pickup Time and Dropout Time of Logic Timer 01 is set in GLOBAL SETTING/ PLC/ COMMON/ LOGIC TIMER menu. . NOTE ) Time Over Current Element related Logic Bit designation
Y51P1T : Time Over Current1(Fast) Time-out Phase
134
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Y51P2T : Time Over Current1(Delay) Time-out - Phase Y51G1T : Time Over Current1(Fast) Time-out Ground Y51G2T : Time Over Current1(Delay) Time-out - Ground Y51N1T : Time Over Current1(Fast) Time-out S.E.F Y51N2T : Time Over Current1(Delay) Time-out S.E.F Y51Q1T : Time Over Current1(Fast) Time-out NEQ Y51Q2T : Time Over Current1(Delay) Time-out - NEQ
2) IOUT101 = TM01 Map the output of Logic Timer 01 into the input of Output101 Pulse Timer. When the Pulse Timer input signal is 1, pulse signal is outputted. Output pulse time is set in GLOBAL SETTING/ PLC/ DI/DO / OUTPUT PULSE TIME menu. 3) BOUT101 = 0 As there is no block condition for Output101 port, 0 is always inputted. The logic diagram for the logical expression example above is as Figure 6-17. OUT101 Output Signal Logic Diagram.
Figure 6-18. OUT101 Output Signal Logic Diagram
PLC Editting Example

As shown in Figure 6-18. PLC Edit Screen, input the logical expression in the PLC edit screen operating program then upload PLC data to ETR300-R. For more info, consult ETR300 Interface Software User Manual. NOTE : when editing PLC logic, there must not be any blank space.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
135
Figure 6-19. PLC Edit Screen
6.8. Others
Place the curser on OTHERS in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
[OTHERS] >1.TIME DISP TYPE 2.PANEL SLEEP TIME 3.Vo SELECT 4.FACTORY DEBUG 5.AUTO SGRP CHANGE 6.H/W OPTION
6.8.1. Time Display Type

Place the curser on TIME DISP TYPE in OTHERS menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. It is to set Date Display for all related Menu. GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / TIME DISP TYPE
[TIME DISPTYPE] >Time DispType: MDY [YMD/MDY]
Range
YMD, MDY Step ~
Default MDY
YMD : it displays in turn Year / Month / Date MDY : it displays in turn Month / Date / Year
136
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.8.2. Panel Sleep Time

Place the curser on PANEL SLEEP TIME in OTHERS menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Menu to set the interval time that User interface panel turns into sleep mode. GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / PANEL SLEEP TIME
[PANEL SLEEP TIME] >Sleep Time: OFF [0(OFF),1~100:1m]
Range
OFF, 1 ~ 100 min Step 1 min
Default OFF
Set a time for sleep mode delay. Within this set time, if there is no key operation on interface panel, ETR300-R goes into sleep mode.
6.8.3. Vo Select
Place the curser on Vo SELECT in OTHERS menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / Vo SELECT
[V0 SELECT] >Select: SEQ [H/W/SEQ]
Range
H/W, SEQ Step ~
Default SEQ*
Select the zero sequence voltage used in ground over current Protection element and SEF overcurrent protection element. H/W : Use the zero sequence voltage as input voltage of side panel Vo voltage input pin. SEQ : Use the zero sequence voltage calculated by Va, Vb and Vc voltage value. NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to the option type.
6.8.4. Factory Debug

This menu is for Manufacturers maintenance purpose.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
137
6.8.5. Auto Setting Group Change

Sometimes, Recloser can be installed reversely against Power Flow(supply). In this case, it is necessary to change Protection setting. ETR300-R has two option to help in this situation. ETR300-R has two options Primary Setting and Alternate Setting. And these settings can be selected automatically by AUTO SGRP CHANGE function. Place the curser on AUTO SGRP CHANGE in OTHERS menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / AUTO SGRP CHANGE / Function
[AUTO SGRP CHANGE] >Function: DISABLE Interval: 30 [DISABLE/ENABLE]
Range
DISABLE/ENABLE Step ~
Default DISABLE
Set whether to use Setting Group Change. When this function is used, Primary setting is applied if power flow is forward and Alternate setting is applied if power flow is reverse (backward).
GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / AUTO SGRP CHANGE / Interval

[AUTO SGRP CHANGE] >Function: DISABLE >Interval: 30 [10~180:1]
Range
Default 30
If power flow is changed for this set time, setting group is changed.
Applying rules
This function is operated when Power line system is in normal condition. During fault detecting(pickup status) or in fault condition, it does not work. This function shall be operated when 3 phase voltages are more than 50% of rated voltage and at least 1 phase has more than 10% of rated current. NOTE : The location of AUTO SGRP CHANGE menu depends on ETR300-R version. Applicable for Ver 3.7 or higer of ETR300-R : Within GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS menu. Applicable for lower than Ver 3.7 or ETR300-R : Within GROUP SETTING menu.
138
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
6.8.6. H/W Option

Place the curser on H/W OPTION in OTHERS menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. The H/W option of ETR300-R is set in this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / H/W OPTION / EX-IO?
[H/W OPTION] >EX-IO?: GPS/IRIG?: [NO/YES]
Range
NO NO
NO, YES Step ~
Default NO
Select whether the external I/O unit ETIO10 is installed. In fact, even though I/O unit ETIO10 is installed, if this setting is set with "NO", external I/O unit ETIO10 is not able to be used.
GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / H/W OPTION / GPS/IRIG?

[H/W OPTION] >EX-IO?: >GPS/IRIG?: [NO/YES]
Range
NO NO
NO, YES Step ~
Default NO installed.
Select whether the time synchronization module(GPS or IRIG) is In fact, even though time synchronization module is installed, if this setting is set with "NO", the time synchronization module is not able to be used.
NOTE : The menu is supported from version 3.80 of ETR300-R.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
139
7. GROUP SETTING
Place the curser on GROUP SETTING in MAIN menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
[GLOBAL SETTING] >1.PRIMARY 2.ALTERNATE 3.EDITBANK 4.SELECT SETBANK 5.AUTO SGRP CHANGE
GROUP SETTING menu has PRIMARY group, ALTERNATE group and EDITEBANK group. Group is selected by ON/OFF ALTERNATE SETTINGS LED on ETR300-R panel. If ATERNATE SETTING LED is OFF, PRIMARY group settings are applied, ALTERNATE SETTINGS LED is ON, ALTERNATE group settings are applied.
Figure 7-1. Alternate Settings
140
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7.1. Protection(Primary, Alternate and Editebank Setup)

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE and EDITBANK groups sub-menu are all the same as below. Sub-menu are to set Protection elements.
[PRIMARY SETTING] >1.OPERATION 2.INTERVALS 3.PICKUP CURRENT 4.PHASE FAST 5.PHASE DELAY 6.GROUND FAST 7.GROUND DELAY 8.SEF ELEMENT 9.NEG SEQ FUNC 10.NEG FAST 11.NEG DELAY 12.H/C TRIP-PHA 13.H/C TRIP-GND 14.H/C TRIP-NEG 15.H/C LOCKOUT-PHA 16.H/C LOCKOUT-GND 17.H/C LOCKOUT-NEG 18.COLD LOAD PICKUP 19.DIRECTION 20.VOLTAGE 21.FREQUENCY 22.USER CURVE 23.LIVE LOAD BLOCK 24.HOTLINE TAG 25.LIVE LINE 26.DEAMAND 27.OTHER ELEMENT 28.ON/OFF LEVEL 29.ALARM CURRENT 30.LOSS OF PHASE *.SAVE SETTING
NOTE : Changed set value must be saved to be applied. When escaping from *.SAVE SETTING menu or moving to high menu, changed set value is saved by Changed set value saved message.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
141
Protective Elements Block diagram - ANSI Designations
SOURCE
EVRC2A ETR300
OPTION 1 VT 3VT V1, V2, 3V0
CVD VT
OPTION 2 3CVD CVD TRANSDUCER Metering V, I, Watt, var, Hz, PF CT 3WYE
27 1,2
59 1,2
81
50P 1,2
51P 1,2 67P 1,2
25
I1
79 1-4
RECLOSER
I2
46/50 1,2
46/51 1,2
46/67 1,2
3I0
27
OPTION 2 1CVD CVD TRANSDUCER
OPTION 1 VT 1VT
81
50G 1,2
51G 1,2
67G 1,2
51 SEF
67 SEF
ZCT 3I0
LOAD
Figure 7-2. Protective Elements Block Diagram - ANSI Designations
142
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Protective Elements - ANSI Designations

Table 7-1. Protective Elements -ANSI Designations
Protective Elements
Four shot recloser Phase fast time overcurrent Phase delay time overcurrent Ground fast time overcurrent Ground delay time overcurrent Sensitive Earth Fault protection Negative sequence fast time overcurrent Negative sequence delay time overcurrent Phase instantaneous high current trip Ground instantaneous high current trip Negative sequence instantaneous high current trip Phase High current trip lockout Ground High current trip lockout Negative sequence High current trip lockout Cold load pickup Phase directional time control Ground directional time control Directional Sensitive Earth Fault Negative sequence directional time control Under voltage 1 Under voltage 2 Over voltage 1 Over voltage 2 Under frequency Over frequency Synchronism check Sequence coordination Loss of Phase 67P 67G 67SEF 67I2 27-1 27-2 59-1 59-2 81U 81O 25 -
ANSI Designations
79 51P1 51P2 51G1 51G2 51SEF 46(51)-1 46(51)-2 50P1 50G1 46(50)1 50P2 50G2 46(50)2 -
LCD Menu
GROUP SETTING/ / OPERATION and INTERVALS GROUP SETTING/ / PHASE FAST GROUP SETTING/ / PHASE DELAY GROUP SETTING/ / GROUND FAST GROUP SETTING/ / GROUND DELAY GROUP SETTING/ / SEF ELEMENT GROUP SETTING/ / NEG SEQ FAST GROUP SETTING/ / NEG SEQ DELAY GROUP SETTING/ / H/C TRIP-PHA GROUP SETTING/ / H/C TRIP-GND GROUP SETTING/ / H/C TRIP-NEG GROUP SETTING/ / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA GROUP SETTING/ / H/C LOCKOUT-GND GROUP SETTING/ / H/C LOCKOUT-NEG GROUP SETTING/ / COLD LOAD PICKUP GROUP SETTING/ / DIRECTION / PHASE GROUP SETTING/ / DIRECTION / GROUND GROUP SETTING/ / DIRECTION / SEF GROUP SETTING/ / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ GROUP SETTING/ / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLTAGE 1 GROUP SETTING/ / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLTAGE 2 GROUP SETTING/ / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLTAGE 1 GROUP SETTING/ / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLTAGE 2 GROUP SETTING/ / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQUENCY GROUP SETTING/ / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQUENCY GLOBAL SETTING/ MONITORING/ SYNCHROCHECK GROUP SETTING/ / OTHER ELEMENT / Seq Coordi GROUP SETING/ / LOSS OF PHASE
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
143
7.1.1. Reclose (79)

After a fault has occurred, the Reclose element closes the recloser when the programmed reclose interval time expires. The number of operation lockout setting is programmed one to five, and each reclose shot has its own separate reclose interval timer. If the fault is permanent and the recloser continues to trip and reclose, the Reclose element will continue to increment the operating counter. If this continues to the maximum number of the operating lockout programmed in the Reclose element, the reclose logic lockouts. At this moment, if make close operation remotely or locally, Lockout is released and fault detecting is activated. Also, if the fault is temporary, the Lockout sequence of the Recloser is Rest by Reset logic. If the fault is transient, then the reclose logic is reset by the reset logic. The reclosing element can be disabled in the Primary, Alternate settings by one operating lockout or by [RECLOSE ENABLED] push button on user interface panel. The Reclose Element should be enabled to the following settings.
Operation Setup
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OPERATIONS / Lockout-PHA
[OPERATION] >Lockout-PHA: Lockout-GND: [1~5:1]
Range
4 4
1~5 Step 1
Default 4
Select the total number of the phase trip operations. This setting is used to change the total number of the phase trip operations.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OPERATIONS / Lockout-GND

[OPERATION] Lockout-PHA: >Lockout-GND: [1~5:1]
Range
4 4
1~5 Step 1
Default 4
Select the total number of the ground trip operations. This setting is used to change the total number of the ground trip operations.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OPERATIONS / Lockout-SEF

[OPERATION] Lockout-GND: >Lockout-SEF: [1~5:1]
Range
4 4
1~5 Step 1
Default 4
Select the total number of the SEF trip operations. This setting is used to change the total number of the SEF trip operations
144
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OPERATIONS / Lockout-NEQ

[OPERATION] Lockout-SEF: >Lockout-NEQ: [1~5:1]
Range
4 4
1~5 Step 1
Default 4
Select the total number of the negative sequence trip operations. This setting is used to change the total number of the negative sequence trip operations.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OPERATIONS / Fast Curve-PHA

[OPERATION] Lockout-SEF: >Fast Curve-PHA: [0~5:1]
Range
4 2
0~5 Step 1
Default 2
Select the number of the phase fast curve operations. This setting is used to change the number of the phase fast curve operations. The difference between setting [OPERATION] Lockout-PHA and setting [OPERATION] Fast Curve-PHA is the number of remaining phase delay curve operations. . NOTE : Total number of Recloser operation = fast curve Operation No. + delay curve Operation No.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OPERATIONS / Fast Curve-GND

[OPERATION] Fast Curve-PHA: >Fast Curve-GND: [0~5:1]
Range
2 2
0~5 Step 1
Default 2
Select a number for the ground fast curve operations. This setting is used to change the number of the ground fast curve operations. The difference between setting [OPERATION] Lockout-GND and setting [OPERATION] Fast Curve-GND is the number of remaining ground delay curve operations. . NOTE : Total number of Recloser operation = fast curve Operation No. + delay curve Operation No.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
145
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OPERATIONS / Fast Curve-NEQ

[OPERATION] Fast Curve-GND: >Fast Curve-NEQ: [0~5:1]
Range
2 2
0~5 Step 1
Default 2
Select a number for the negative sequence fast curve operations. This setting is used to change the number of the negative sequence fast curve operations. The difference between setting [OPERATION] Lockout-NEQ and setting [OPERATION] Fast Curve-NEQ is the number of remaining negative sequence delay curve operations. . NOTE : Total number of Recloser operation = fast curve Operation No. + delay curve Operation No.
Intervals Setup
Set the reclosing time of phase fault (negative phase sequence included), ground fault and SEF fault. The reclosing time is applied individually according to the fault type. 1) Intervals Setup PHASE/NEQ SEQ PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / INTERVALS / / Reclose 1
[PHASE/NEG SEQ] >Reclose 1: 0.6 Reclose 2: 2.00 [0.5~60.0:0.1s]
Range
Applicable for lower than Ver 3.4 of ETR300-R : 0.5 ~ 600.0 sec Applicable for Ver 3.4 or higher of ETR300-R : 0.1 ~ 600.0 sec Step 0.1 sec
Default 0.6
This setting is used to change the first reclose interval time between the first trip operation and the close operation. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / INTERVALS / / Reclose 2
[PHASE/NEG SEQ] Reclose 1: 0.60 >Reclose 2: 2 [1~1800:1s]
Range
Default 2
This setting is used to change the first reclose interval time between the first trip operation and the close operation.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / INTERVALS / / Reclose 3

[PHASE/NEG SEQ] Reclose 2: 2 >Reclose 3: 2 [1~1800:1s]
Range
Default 2
146
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / INTERVALS / / Reclose 4

[PHASE/NEG SEQ] Reclose 3: 2 >Reclose 4: 15 [1~1800:1s]
Range
Default 15
2) Intervals Setup GROUND The ground interval settings process is the same as the phase interval. 3) Intervals Setup SEF The SEF interval settings process is the same as the phase interval. 4) Intervals Setup OTHER PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / INTERVALS / OTHERS/ Reset T(AR)
[OTHERS] >Reset T(AR): 30 Reset T(LO): 10.00 [3~180:1s]
Range
Default 30
It is to select Reset time during auto reclosing. During reclosing sequence operation, if current is back to normal for this set time, recloser sequence is Reset. Generally, Reclosing reset time shall be set longer than present reclose sequence time. During reclose sequence time, if a fault current is removed, Reset T(AR) time starts and during Reset T(AR) time, a fault is detected again, Reset timer is reset.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / INTERVALS / OTHERS/ Reset T(LO)

[OTHERS] Reset T(AR): 30 >Reset T(LO): 10.00 [1.00~600.00:0.01s]
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 10.00 To set Lockout reset time.
After recloser is closed by locally or remotely, within this set time, auto reclosing is not activated. It is to eliminate reclosing sequence if a fault current is detected after manual closing, and to have waiting time for feeder stabilization. After this set time, Recloser function is activated.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
147
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / INTERVALS / OTHERS/ C/P Wait

[OTHERS] Reset T(LO): 10.0 >C/P Wait: 60.00 [1.00~600.00:0.01s]
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 60.00
Close Power Wait. : Waiting time to get power supply. During reclose sequence, power supply is not enough to operate mechanism, it counts for this set time and if the power supply is not provided, then reclose sequence is stopped and lockout.
7.1.1.1. Lockout
The lockout state occurs under any of the following conditions : When RECLOSE ENABLED LED is OFF and a fault current is occurred. When the high current lockout has occurred. After manual closing, a fault current is occurred within Reset T(LO). When recloser is manually opened. After TRIP occurs, the fault current is not removed or the reclosers 52a contacts do not change status of the recloser opened. After manual closing, Close Power Waiting time is over.
The Lockout State is cleared when the recloser has been manually closed by local/remote control and the reset time has expired. Figure 7-3. Protection sequence containing 2F3D operations followed by lockout shows 2F3D(2 Fast and three Delay) operation and lockout result. The total number of operation is set for 5times and Fast curve operation is set for 2 times. (3 times operation works with Delay Curve)
148
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
(1) 1st Trip - 1st TCC(Fast) (3) 2nd Trip - 2nd TCC(Fast) (5) 3rd Trip - 3rd TCC(Delay) (7) 4th Trip - 4th TCC(Delay) (9) 5th Trip - 5th TCC(Delay)
(2) 1st Reclose Interval Time (4) 2nd Reclose Interval Time (6) 3rd Reclose Interval Time (8) 4th Reclose Interval Time
Figure 7-3. Protection sequence containing 2F3D operations followed by lockout
7.1.1.2. Reset
If the faulted current is cleared before the lockout condition, the reclosing sequence automatically reset after passing the reset time interval. If the fault condition occurs again during the reset time, the recloser will operate lockout after the completion of the remaining sequence. Figure 7-4. Reset Sequence operation after the 3rd reclosing as the fault current is cleared shows that, after 3rd reclosing operation, the fault current is disappeared.
(1) 1st Trip - 1st TCC (3) 2nd Trip - 2nd TCC (5) 3rd Trip - 3rd TCC
(2) 1st Reclose Interval Time (4) 2nd Reclose Interval Time (6) 3rd Reclose Interval Time
Figure 7-4. Reset Sequence operation after the 3rd reclosing as the fault current is cleared
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
149
7.1.2. Phase (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrents (51P)

The ETR300-R has two phase time overcurrent elements. The phase time overcurrent element contained in the ETR300-R, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The phase time overcurrent element is the most commonly used as a protective element for distribution systems and also used in both down-line and back-up recloser protection. The phase time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping that is used for an inverse time curve characteristic coordinated with current pickup value, curve type, time dial, time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type. This inverse characteristic means that time overcurrent element operates slowly on small values of current above the pickup value and operates faster when current increases significantly above the pickup value. The phase time overcurrent element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel. Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the phase time overcurrent element to respectively coordinate with other protection elements in the ETR300-R and other external devices on the distribution system. ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER and non-standard time current curves are included in the ETR300-R. A User Programmable curve option is also available for user to allow creating customs time current curves for more enhanced coordination than the standard curve types. The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The phase time delay reset mode applies to the ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution system. In the instantaneous mode, the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when the measured current level drops below the pickup setting for one cycle. Linear reset mode, the recloser is used for the cooperation with the protection device necessary for delay time as mechanical relay reset. If the recloser is closed by pressing the CLOSE button on the front panel, or by an remote control or via SCADA, the phase time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a period specified by the Cold load pickup scheme.
150
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
The following setting is used to program the phase fast time overcurrent element.
Phase Pickup Current Setup

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PICKUP CURRENT / Phase
[PICKUP CURRENT] >Phase: 500 Ground: 250 [0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
Range
OFF, 10 ~ 1600A Step 1
Default 500A
Set the pickup current of Phase Time Overcurrent Elements.
Phase Fast Setup

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PHASE FAST / Curve
[PHASE FAST] >Curve: [ANSI-NI] >Time Dial: 1.00 [curves : total 50]
Range Default
A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S Applicable for lower than Ver 3.4 of ETR300-R : ANSI-NI Applicable for Ver 3.4 or higher of ETR300-R : ANSI-VI
Select the desired curve type : ANSI ES ES-NI : KEPCO Normally Inverse ES-VI : KEPCO Very Inverse ANSI-NI : ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse ANSI-VI : ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse ANSI-EI : ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse IEC-NI : IEC Normally Inverse IEC-VI : IEC Very Inverse IEC-EI : IEC Extremely Inverse
IEC
Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s KERI Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4 User curves : USER-1,USER-2,USER-3,USER-4 McGraw-Edison : Non Standard Curves 32
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
151
Table 7-2. Recloser time-current operation characteristic setting range

Setting Curve Setting Curve Setting Curve Setting Curve Setting Curve 1 A(101) 11 IEC-NI 21 2(135) 31 13(142) 41 ANSI-VI 2 B(117) 12 P(115) 22 3(140) 32 14(119) 42 ANSI-EI 3 C(133) 13 R(105) 23 4(106) 33 15(112) 43 ES-NI 4 D(116) 14 T(161) 24 5(114) 34 16(139) 44 ES-VI 5 E(132) 15 V(137) 25 6(136) 35 18(151) 45 USER-1 6 IEC-EI 16 IEC-VI 26 7(152) 36 N1 46 USER-2 7 K(162) 17 W(138) 27 8(113) 37 N2 47 USER-3 8 L(107) 18 Y(120) 28 8*(111) 38 N3 48 USER-4 9 M(118) 19 Z(134) 29 9(131) 39 N4 49 DEF-1S 10 N(104) 20 1(102) 30 11(141) 40 ANSI-NI 50 DEF-10S
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PHASE FAST / Time Dial

[PHASE FAST] Curve: [ANSI-NI] >Time Dial: 1.00 [0.05~15.00:0.01]
Range
0.05 ~ 15.00 Step 0.01
Default 1.00
Select Time dial, multiplying this value to selected curve. Multiplying this value changes the slope of the curve. Time dial is conducted after Time Add application.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PHASE FAST / Time Add

[PHASE FAST] Time Dial: 0.50 >Time Add: 0.00 [0.00~10.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 0.00
Select Time adder, it is adding set value on the curve. T-C curve delay time is increased as much as Time adder value.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PHASE FAST / M.R.T

[PHASE FAST] Time Add: 0.00 >M.R.T: 0.00 [0.00~10.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 0.00 to T-C curve for more delay.
T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is added This function can be useful for other protective device and line fuse coordination.
152
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PHASE FAST / Reset Method

[PHASE FAST] M.R.T: 0.00 >Reset Method: INST [INST/LINEAR]
Range
INST, LINEAR Step ~
Default INST overcurrent protection is reset. INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.
In case that a fault current is decreased under Pickup level, Phase Fast
LINEAR : When the fault value is reached at selected curves Rt(Reset characteristic constant) value, Reset. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PHASE FAST / Low Set Definite Time
[PHASE FAST] >M.R.T: 0.00 >Reset Method: INST >Low Set DT: OFF
Range
0(OFF), 1 ~ 600sec Step 1sec
Default OFF
Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite time adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. When the trip time is greater than the low set definite time, low set definite time is applied for operation.
Phase Delay Setup

The phase delay time overcurrent settings process is very similarly to the phase fast time overcurrent setting process.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
153
7.1.3. Ground (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (51G)

The ETR300-R has two ground time overcurrent elements. The ground time overcurrent element in the ETR300-R is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The ground time overcurrent element is the most commonly used as a protective element for distribution systems and also used in both down-line and back-up recloser protection. The ground time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping that is used for an inverse time curve characteristic coordinated with current pickup value, curve type, time dial, time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type. This inverse characteristic means that time overcurrent element operates slowly on small values of current above the pickup value and operates faster when current increases significantly above the pickup value. The ground time overcurrent element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel. Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the ground time overcurrent element to closely coordinate with other protection elements within the ETR300-R and other external devices on the distribution system. ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER and non-standard time current curves are included in the ETR300-R. A User Programmable curve option is also available allowing the user to create customer time current curves for more enhanced coordination than the standard curve types. The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The ground time delay reset mode applies to the ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution system. In the instantaneous mode the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when the current level measured by the ETR300-R drops below the pickup setting for one cycle. Linear reset mode, the recloser is used for the cooperation with the protection device necessary for delay time as mechanical relay reset. If the recloser is closed by pressing the CLOSE button on the front panel, or by an remote control or via SCADA, the ground time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a period specified by the Cold load pickup scheme.
154
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
The following setting is used to program the ground time overcurrent element.
Ground Pickup Current Setup

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PICKUP CURRENT / Ground
[PICKUP CURRENT] >Phase: 500 >Ground: 250 [0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
Range
0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A Step 1
Default 250A
Set the pickup current of Ground Time Overcurrent Elements.
Ground Fast Setup

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / GROUND FAST / Curve
[GROUND FAST] >Curve: [ANSI-NI] >Time Dial: 1.00 [curves : total 50]
Range Default
Select the desired curve type : For more details, refer to Table 7-2. Recloser time-current operation characteristic setting range PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / GROUND FAST / Time Dial
[GROUND FAST] Curve: [ANSI-NI] >Time Dial: 1.00 [0.05~15.00:0.01]
Range
0.05 ~ 15.00 Step 0.01
Default 1.00
Select Time dial, multiplying this value to selected curve. Multiplying this value changes the slope of the curve. Time dial is conducted after Time Adder application.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / GROUND FAST / Time Add

[GROUND FAST] Time Dial: 1.00 >Time Add: 0.00 [0.00~10.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 0.00
Select Time adder, it is adding set value on the curve. T-C curve delay time is increased as much as Time add value.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
155
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / GROUND FAST / M.R.T

[GROUND FAST] Time Add: 0.00 >M.R.T: 0.00 [0.00~10.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 0.00 to T-C curve for more delay.
T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is added This function can be useful for other protective device and line fuse coordination.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / GROUND FAST / Reset Method

[GROUND FAST] M.R.T: 0.00 >Reset Method: INST [INST/LINEAR]
Range
INST, LINEAR Step ~
Default INST Over-Current Elements is reset. INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.
In case that a fault current is decreased under Pickup level, Phase Time
LINEAR : When the fault value is reached at selected curves Rt(Reset characteristic constant) value, Reset. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / GROUND FAST / Low Set Definite Time
[GROUND FAST] >M.R.T: 0.00 >Reset Method: INST >Low Set DT: OFF
Range
0(OFF), 1 ~ 600sec Step 1sec
Default OFF
Ground Delay Setup

The ground delay time overcurrent settings process is very similarly to the ground fast time overcurrent setting process.
156
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7.1.4. Sensitive Earth Fault (51SEF)

The sensitive earth fault (SEF) is applicable to systems that have restricted current flow for phase to earth fault. The SEF is not applicable to the case in 4 wire multi-earthed systems. The sensitivity of SEF element for non-earthed systems is dependent upon available fault current and the accuracy of CTs. For SEF element, ETR300-R has the separate SEF terminal on side panel. This input can be connected in series with the provided phase CTs(standard) or connected to a separate window type ZCT. The SEF element provides a definite time delay versus current . The SEF element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and PROTECTION ENABLED and SEF ENABLED on user interface panel. For user systems, a directional SEF is available. The directional control is polarized by a zero sequence voltage(V0). The CVD or PTs should be connected Wye-grounded. The SEF element in the following three settings should be enabled.
SEF Pickup Current Setup

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PICKUP CURRENT / S.E.F
[PICKUP CURRENT] >SEF: OFF Neq Seq: 500 [(0)OFF,0.1~160.0A]
Range
0(OFF), 0.1~160.0 Step 0. 1A
Default OFF
Set the pickup current of SEF Elements. In the case of ZCT, 0.1~160.0A as pickup current is configurable, while in the case of general purpose CT, its recommended not to set below 2A as pickup current.
SEF Pickup Current Setup

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / Time Delay
[SEF ELEMENT] >Time Delay: 5.0 [0.0~180.0:0.1s]
Range
0.00 ~ 180.0 sec Step 0.1 sec
Default 5.0 pickup.
SEF delay time set. If it is set for 0, SET element trips immediately on
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
157
7.1.5. Negative Sequence (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (46)

The ETR300-R has two negative sequence time overcurrent elements. The negative sequence element measures the amount of unbalance current in the system. The negative sequence overcurrent element can also be used to detect phase to ground and two phase ground faults. The negative sequence time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping using that an inverse time curve characteristic is operated to coordinate, current pickup value, curve type, time dial, time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type. The negative sequence time overcurrent element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and both PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel. Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the negative sequence time overcurrent element to closely coordinate with other protection elements in the ETR300-R and other external devices on the distribution system. The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The negative sequence time delay reset mode applies to the ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution system. In the instantaneous mode, the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when the measured current level drops below the pickup setting for one cycle. Linear reset mode, the recloser is used for the cooperation with the protection device necessary for delay time as mechanical relay reset. If the recloser is closed by pressing the CLOSE button on the front panel, or by an remote control or via SCADA, the negative sequence time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a period specified by the Cold load pickup scheme.
NEG Seq Pickup Current Setup

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PICKUP CURRENT / NEG Seq
[PICKUP CURRENT] >SEF: 0FF >Neq Seq: 400 [0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
Range
0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A Step 1A
Default 500
Set the pickup current of NEG Seq Time Overcurrent Elements.
158
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
NEG Seq Function

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / NEG SEQ FUNC/ Function
[NEG SEQ FUNCTION] >Function : OFF [OFF/TR/AL/TR&AL]
Range
OFF, TR, AL, TR&AR Step ~
Default OFF
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = TR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition, Trip operates. If function = AL, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a ALARM condition, Trip operates. If function = TR&AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TR& AR condition, it trips and alarms.
NEG Seq Fast Setup

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / NEG SEQ FAST / Curve
[NEG SEQ FAST] >Curve: [ANSI-NI] >Time Dial: 0.50 [curves : total 50]
Range Default
Select the desired curve type . For more details, refer to Table 7-2. Recloser time-current operation characteristic setting range PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / NEG SEQ FAST / Time Dial
[NEG SEQ FAST] Curve: [ANSI-NI] >Time Dial: 0.50 [0.05~15.00:0.01]
Range
0.05 ~ 15.00 Step 0.01
Default 0.50
Set Time dial which multiplies to a selected curve. It is performed after Time Adder application. Time dial changes the slope of the curve.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / NEG SEQ FAST / Time Add

[NEG SEQ FAST] Time Dial: 0.50 >Time Add: 0.00 [0.00~10.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 0.00 curve delay time.
Set a time adder. It is added to a selected curve. It is added on to T-C
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
159
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / NEG SEQ FAST / M.R.T

[NEG SEQ FAST] Time Add: 0.00 >M.R.T: 0.00 [0.00~10.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 0.00
Minimum Response Time setting. T-C curve trip time is faster than set value, this set time will be used as delay time for trip. This function is used for coordination with other device or Fuse.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / NEG SEQ FAST / Reset Method

[NEG SEQ FAST] M.R.T: 0.00 >Reset Method: INST [INST/LINEAR]
Range
INST, LINEAR Step ~
Default INST overcurrent element reset is made. INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.
If a fault current is decreased under Pickup level, Phase Fast
LINEAR : When the fault value is reached at selected curves Rt(Reset characteristic constant) value, Reset. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / NEG SEQ FAST / Low Set Definite Time
[NEG SEQ FAST] >M.R.T: 0.00 >Reset Method: INST >Low Set DT: OFF
Range
OFF, 1 ~ 600sec Step 1sec
Default OFF
NEG Seq Delay Setup

The negative sequence delay time overcurrent setting process is very similar the negative sequence fast time overcurrent setting process.
160
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7.1.6. Phase High Current Trip (50P-1)

The ETR300-R has a phase high current trip element. The phase high current trip element in the ETR300-R, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The phase high current trip element provides a definite time delay versus current. The operating time of phase high current trip element should be set for equal to or faster than the phase time overcurrent elements. The phase high current trip element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and PROTECTION ENABLED on user interface panel. Phase high current trip is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme. The phase high current trip element in the following five settings should be enabled for phase high current trip. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-PHA / Sequence
[ H/C TRIP-PHA ] >Sequence: 1 >Pickup: 4000 [0(OFF),1~5:1]
Range
0(OFF), 1~5 shot Step 1shot
Default 1
If Sequence = OFF, the feature is not operate. If Sequence = 1, then Phase High current trip is enabled for the first trip operation and every following trip operation.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-PHA / Pickup

[ H/C TRIP-PHA ] >Pickup: 4000 >Time Delay: 0.00 [0(OFF),10~20000:1A]
Range
0(OFF), 10 ~ 20000 A Step 1A
Default 4000
Set the pickup current of Phase High current Trip Elements. This value is the minimum operating current of Phase High current Trip Elements.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-PHA / Time Delay

[ H/C TRIP-PHA ] >Pickup: 4000 >Time Delay: 0.00 [0.00~1.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 1.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 0.00
Set Time Delay for Phase High current trip. If it is set for 0, trips immediately on phase high current without delay.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
161
7.1.7. Ground High Current Trip (50G-1)

The ETR300-R has a ground high current trip element. The ground high current trip element in the ETR300-R is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The ground high current trip element provides a definite time delay versus current. The operating time of ground high current trip overcurrent element should be set for equal to or faster than the ground time overcurrent elements. The ground high current trip element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings both PROTECTION ENABLED and GROUND ENABLED in user interface panel. Ground high current trip is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme. The ground high current trip element in the following five settings should be enabled for ground high current trip. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-GND / Sequence
[ H/C TRIP-GND ] >Sequence: 1 >Pickup: 4000 [0(OFF),1~5:1]
Range
Default 1
If Sequence = OFF, the feature is not operate. If Sequence = 1, then Ground High current trip is enabled for the first trip operation and every following trip operation.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-GND / Pickup

[ H/C TRIP-GND ] >Pickup: 4000 >Time Delay: 0.00 [0(OFF),10~20000:1A]
Range
0(OFF), 10 ~ 20000A Step 1A
Default 4000
Set the pickup current of Ground High current Trip Elements. This value is the minimum operating current of Ground High current Trip Elements.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-GND / Time Delay

[ H/C TRIP-GND ] >Pickup: 4000 >Time Delay: 0.00 [0.00~1.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 1.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 0.00
Set Time Delay for Ground High current trip. If it is set for 0, trips immediately on ground high current without delay.
162
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7.1.8. Negative Sequence High Current Trip (46(50)-1)

The negative sequence high current trip in the ETR300-R is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The negative sequence high current trip element provides a definite time delay versus current. The operating time of negative sequence high current trip element should be set equal to or faster than the negative sequence time overcurrent elements. The negative sequence high current trip element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and PROTECTION on user interface panel. The negative sequence high current trip is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme. The ground high current trip element in the following five settings should be enabled for negative sequence high current trip. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Sequence
[ H/C TRIP-GND ] >Sequence: 1 >Pickup: 4000 [0(OFF),1~5:1]
Range
Default 1
If Sequence = OFF, the feature is not operate. If Sequence = 1, then Negative Seq High current trip is enabled for the first trip operation and every following trip operation.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Pickup

[ H/C TRIP-GND ] >Pickup: 4000 >Time Delay: 0.00 [0(OFF),10~20000:1A]
Range
0(OFF), 10 ~ 20000 A Step 1A
Default 4000
Set the pickup current of Negative Seq High current Trip Elements. This value is the minimum operating current of Negative Seq High current Trip Elements.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Time Delay

[ H/C TRIP-GND ] >Pickup: 4000 >Time Delay: 0.00 [0.00~1.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 1.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 0.00
Set Time Delay for Negative Seq High current trip. If it is set for 0, trips immediately on ground high current without delay.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
163
7.1.9. Phase High Current Lockout (50P-2)

The ETR300-R has a phase high current lockout element. The phase high current lockout element in the ETR300-R is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The phase high current lockout element provides a definite time delay versus current. When high current lockout element is enabled, high current lockout element is operated prior to any other phase protection elements. If a fault current is higher than the pickup setting value, Lockout is operated. The phase high current lockout element can be set by a number of its active trip that is applied to the full operation to lockout, time delay and fault current. This function is very useful to prevent widespread line faults due to reclosing operations in case of permanent fault. The operating time of phase high current lockout element should be set for equal to or faster than and phase high current trip element. The phase high current lockout element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate setting and PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel. The phase high current lockout element is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme. The phase high current lockout element in the following five setting should be enabled for phase high current trip. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Function
[ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] >Function: 1 Pickup: 8000 [0(OFF),1~5:1]
Range
0(OFF), 1 ~5shot Step 1shot
Default 1
If set 1 or other number, on this shot Lockout function is activated. For instance, if it is set for 3 short, during sequence, from third reclosing point, Lockout function is activated.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Pickup

[ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Function: OFF >Pickup: 8000 [0(OFF),10~20000:1A]
Range
0(OFF), 10 ~ 20000 A Step 1A
Default 8000
Set the pickup curent of Phase High Current Lockout Elements.
164
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Time Delay

[ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Pickup: 8000 >Time Delay: 0.00 [0.00~1.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 1.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 1.00
Phase high current Lockout operation delay time setting. If it is set for 0, phase high current lockout element operate and lockouts immediately on pickup.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
165
7.1.10. Ground High Current Lockout (50G-2)

The ETR300-R has a ground high current lockout element. The ground high current lockout element in the ETR300-R, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The ground high current lockout element provides a definite time delay versus current. The operating time of ground high current lockout overcurrent element should be set for equal to or faster than the ground high current trip element. The ground high current lockout element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and both PROTECTION ENABLED and GROUND ENABLED in user interface panel. The ground high current lockout is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme. The ground high current lockout element in the following five settings should be enabled for ground high current lockout. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Function
[ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] >Function: 1 Pickup: 8000 [0(OFF),1~5:1]
Range
0(OFF), 1 ~ 5shot Step 1shot
Default 1
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Pickup

[ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Function: OFF >Pickup: 8000 [0(OFF),10~20000:1A]
Range
0(OFF), 10 ~ 20000 A Step 1A
Default 8000
Set the pickup curent of Ground High Current Lockout Elements.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT- GND / Time Delay

[ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Pickup(xCT): 4000 >Time Delay: 0.00 [0.00~1.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 1.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 1.00
Ground high current lockout operation delay time set. If it is set for 0, it operates immediately and lockouts on pickup.
166
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7.1.11. Negative Sequence High Current Lockout (46(50)-2)

The negative sequence high current lockout element should be set equal to or faster than the negative sequence high current trip element. The negative sequence high current lockout element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and both PROTECTION ENABLED and GROUND ENABLED in user interface panel. Negative sequence high current lockout is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme. The negative sequence high current lockout element in the following five settings should be enabled for the negative sequence high current lockout. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT-NEG / Function
[ H/C LOCKOUT-NEG ] >Function: 1 Pickup: 8000 [0(OFF),1~5:1]
Range
0(OFF), 1 ~ 5shot Step 1shot
Default 1
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT-NEG / Pickup

[ H/C LOCKOUT-NEG ] Function: OFF >Pickup: 8000 [0(OFF),10~20000:1A]
Range
0(OFF), 10 ~ 20000 A Step 1A
Default 8000 Elements.
Set the pickup curent of Negative Sequence High Current Lockout
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT-NEG / Time Delay

[ H/C LOCKOUT-NEG ] Pickup: 8000 >Time Delay: 0.00 [0.00~1.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 1.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 1.00
Negative sequence high current lockout operation delay time set. If it is set for 0, it operates immediately and lockouts on pickup.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
167
7.1.12. Cold Load Pickup

The cold load pickup function is used to prevent the recloser from incorrectly operating caused by the restoration of load supply or the cold load current of load side. ETR300-R provides CLPUType 1 to prevent the recloser from operating wrong by instantaneous inrush current occurring by the closing of device on a power line and CLPU-Type 2 to prevent protection elements from operating wrong by the cold load current caused by applying voltage to a transformer, a reactor or a long-distance line.
7.1.12.1. Cold Load Pickup Type 1

The settings of CLPU-Type 1 are separated and set respectively for phase, ground, SEF or negative phase over current element. In the state of the function to restrain the inrush current activated, the overcurrent protection element will be operated under settings of CLPU-Type 1 function at the restoration of load supply. NOTE: According to setting of Make use I, the condition to decide the restoration of load supply will be changed. If YES is set, the decision is made when the load current becomes over 2A. If NO is set, the decision is made when a recloser is closed (51A) by local or remote control. When a distributed system is closed after long-time outage, the inrush current over overcurrent pickup level may occur. At occurrence of the cold load pickup, ETR300-R increases the pickup level of overcurrent element during a certain period of time, the Fast overcurrent protection element is not operated and the Delay overcurrent protection element is always operated regardless of the cold load pickup function. (The High Current Trip and High Current Lockout are always operated regardless of the cold load pickup function) If a fault occurs on distributed system, an overcurrent protection element is operated by the cold load pickup function and a recloser becomes lockout after oneshot trip regardless of total number of shots. A power is lost and then after certain outage time, the algorithm of cold load pickup function is applied at the restoration of load supply. If the Make use 1 is set to be YES, the algorithm is applied when a load current becomes 0 and then it is restored after certain outage time. If NO is set, the algorithm is applied when a recloser is opened and then after certain outage time, the
168
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
recloser is closed manually. If the fault current over the cold load pickup level occurs, the protection element by the cold load pickup function is operated immediately. If the power loss (opening or load current loss) is sustained for a long time more than certain outage time, the pickup current of time overcurrent element is changed to be the setting value of the cold load pickup current. After the restoration of load supply (manually closing or restoration of load current), protection functions are normally operated when the Restore minimum time (RMT) is expired.
Non Trip Area
Trip Area
Time
Delay Curve
Current
Overcurrent Pickup Level Cold load Pickup Level
Figure 7-5. The Cold Load Pickup Characteristic The cold load pickup function is operated according to the following rules. The setting to use the cold load pickup function is set to be ON (set to TRIP or TR&AR), the cold load pickup level is preset and then the cold load pickup function is activated at manual close or restoration of load current. If the level of over current occurring at the restoration of load supply is over the cold load pickup current, the Lockout is done by protection function after oneshot trip (Refer the Inrush Current 1 in Figure 7-6. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic). If the over current is below cold load pickup current and overcurrent pickup current, protection functions are not operated during a period of Restore minimum Time (RMT), (Refer the Inrush
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
169
Current 2 in Figure 7-6. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic). After RMT, the protection functions are operated. However, if the over current is dropped below overcurrent pickup current during the RMT, the cold load pickup function is reset after reset time (Refer the Inrush Current 3 in Figure 7-6. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic).
Current Outage time Restore Minimum Time
Inrush current 1 CLPU Pickup Level Trip
Inrush current 2 Overcurrent Pickup Level Trip Inrush current 3 Time
Figure 7-6. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic If high current trip and high current lockout functions are activated and the fault current is higher than the current setting of High current trip and high current lockout, the high current trip and high current lockout functions will be operated prior to the cold load pickup function.
170
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7.1.12.2. Cold Load Pickup Type 2

In the state of cold load, this type is used to restrain the operation of protection functions to over current occurring by change of load (the close of a switch on long-distance line, incoming heavy load etc.). This function to restrain protection functions rises or drops the pickup level of time overcurrent element during certain time (E-CLP time) defined by a user. Over Current Pickup Level Step Up At power loss (a recloser is opened or a load current is 0A), the current of Over Current Pickup is risen as follows.
Without Supply Time Operational Cold Load Multi' = 1 + E CLP Time ( E CLP Multi' 1)
As example, when E-CLP Multi and E-CLT Time are set to be 3.0 and 60min respectively, over 30 min after power loss, the applied cold load multiple is 2. If the minimum working currentis set to be 200A, the current of Over Current Pickup becomes 400A, twice as much as the minimum working current. In addition, after 60 min, the cold load multiple is fixed to be 3. Over Current Pickup Level Step Down If power is restored (manual closed or restoration of load current (over 2A)), the current of Over Current Pickup is dropped with the same speed when rising until the cold load multiple becomes 1. When E-CLP Multi and E-CLP Time are set to be 3.0 and 60 min respectively, the graph of the cold load multiple in Figure 7-7. Cold Load Multipilier is shown as follows. NOTE: The risen level of overcurrent pickup by multiple of cold load is the pickup level to operate overcurrent protection element. The standard current level of TC curve is a minimum working current.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
171
Figure 7-7. Cold Load Multipilier
7.1.12.3. Cold Load Pickup Setup

The Cold Load Pickup feature in the following settings should be enabled.
CLPU COMMON Setup

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Func-PHA
[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] >Funct-PHA: ON Funct-GND: ON [OFF/ON]
Range
OFF, ON Step ~
Default ON
OFF : Cold load pickup function on the phase does not operate. ON : Cold load pickup function on phase operates.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Func-GND

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] >Funct-PHA: ON >Funct-GND: ON [OFF/ON]
Range
OFF, ON Step ~
Default ON
OFF : Cold load pickup function on the ground does not operate. ON : Cold load pickup function on ground operates.
172
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Func-NEG

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] >Funct-GND: ON >Funct-NEG: ON [OFF/ON]
Range
OFF, ON Step ~
Default ON operate.
OFF : Cold load pickup function on the Negative sequence does not ON : Cold load pickup function on the Negative sequence operates.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Func-SEF

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] >Funct-SEF: ON PHA(A): 2000 [OFF/ON]
Range
OFF, ON Step ~
Default ON
OFF : Cold load pickup function on the SEF does not operate. ON : Cold load pickup function on the SEF operates.
CLPU-TYPE1 Setup
This setting is to restrain the inrush current occurring at restoration of load supply. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / PHA(A)
[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] >PHA(A): 2000 >Curve-PHA: [ N3] [0(OFF),1~20000:1A]
Range
0(OFF), 10 ~ 20000A Step 1A
Default 2000 CT ratio times this set value.
Set phase inrush current restraint value. Pickup value is calculated by
. NOTE : GND(A), NEG(A) and SEF(A), the same as SEF(A) above. But, default value of SEF(A) is 20.0A. . NOTE : In the case of ZCT, 0.1~160.0A as SEF is configurable, while in the case of general purpose CT, its recommended not to set below 2A as SEF. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Curve-PHA
[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] >Curve-PHA: [ N3] >Time Dial-PHA: 1.00 [curves : total 50]
Range
A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S Step ~
Default N3
Set T-C curve to apply when Phase in-rush current is more than few times of phase disconnect in-rush current. Applicable curve ragne refers to Table 7-2. Recloser time-current operation characteristic setting range .
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
173
. NOTE : Curve-GND and Curve NEG, the same as Curve -PHA above. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Time Dial-PHA
[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Curve-PHA: [ N3] >Time Dial-PHA: 1.00 [0.05~15.00:0.01]
Range
0.05 ~ 15.00 Step 0.01
Default 1.00
Set a coefficient to apply to a set curve. The coefficunet application changes the slop of a curve. Coefficient multiply works after Time Adder.
. NOTE : Time Dial-GND and Time Dial-NEG, the same as Time Dial-PHA above. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Time Addr-PHA
[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Time Dial-PHA: 1.00 >Time Addr-PHA: 0.00 [0.00~10.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 0.00 including its own delay time.
Adding a time onto a set curve. More delays due to this set time
. NOTE : Time Addr-GND and Time Addr-NEG, the same as Time Addr-PHA above.. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / M.R.T-PHA
[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Time Add-PHA: 0.00 >M.R.T-PHA: 0.00 [0.00~10.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 0.00
Minimum response time. A set T-C curve is faster than this set time, tripping may be delayed as much as this set time. This function can be cooperated with other protection device or fuse.
. NOTE : M.R.T-GND and M.R.T-NEG, the same as M.R.T-PHA above.
174
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Outage Time

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] >SEF(A): 20.0 >Outage Time: 10.0 [0.00~600.00:0.01]
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 1.0
Set a time to disable Cold load pickup. When recloser opens, Outage Time timer is operated. Within this set time, if recloser is closed, cold load pickup is not operated. After the set time, if recloser is closed, cold load pickup function is operated.
Figure 7-8. Outage time logic diagram PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / RMT Func-PHA
[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] >RMT Func-PHA: ON >RMT Time-PHA: 3.00 [OFF/ON]
Range
OFF, ON Step ~
Default ON
Set whether to use Phase Minimum operation current reset function. ON : After recloser close and after Restore Minimum Time(RMT time), Inrush Current Restraint algorithm is stopped and phase overcurrent protection function operates(Pickup level is changed from Cold load pickup to Overcurrent pickup level). OFF : After recloser close and after Restore Minimum Time(RMT time), Inrush current restraint algorithm remains. Lower than over current pickup level shall be kept for Cold load reset time(Rst TimePHA set time) so that Inrush Current Restraint algorithm is stopped and over current protection function operates.
. NOTE : RMT Func-GND, RMT Func-SEF and RMT Func-NEG, the same as RMT Func-PHA above. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / RMT Time-PHA
[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] >RMT Func-PHA: ON >RMT Time-PHA: 3.00 [0.00~60.00:0.01s]
Range
Default 3.00
Select the restore minimum time required for the inrush load. The Restore Minimum Time have to raised pickup levels for overcurrent detection from cold load pickup value back to nominal pickup level.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
175
. NOTE : RMT Time-GND, RMT Time-SEF and RMT Time-NEG, the same as RMT TimePHA above. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Rst Time-PHA
[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] RMT Time-PHA: 3.00 >Rst Time-PHA: 3.00 [0.00~60.00:0.01s]
Range
Default 3.00
Cold load pickup Reset Time setting on phase inrush current. Inrush current that is lower than over current pickup level, is kept for this set time, Inrush current restraint algorithm is stopped and normal over current protection function operates(Pickup level changes from Cold load pickup level to over current pickup level). . NOTE : Rst Time-GND, Rst Time-SEF and Rst Time-NEG, the same as Rst Time-PHA above.
CLPU-TYPE2 Setup
This setup is to rise or drop the current for Over Current Pickup of a protection element PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Make Use I
[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] >Rst Time-PHA: 3.00 >Make Use I: NO [NO/YES]
Range
NO, YES Step ~
Default NO function.
This setting changes the point of time to activate a cold load pickup If YES is set, the cold load pickup function is activated when a load current is restored (over 2A). If NO is set, the cold load pickup function is activated when a recloser is manually closed by local or remote control.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / E-CLP Multi

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] >Make Use I: NO >E-CLP Multi: 2.0 [1.0~5.0:0.1]
Range
1.0~5.0 Step 0.1
Default 2.0
Set the multiple of cold load. If 1.0 is set, the cold load multiple is not applied and the setting of minimum working current is always applied for overcurrent pickup current.
176
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / E-CLP Time

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] >E-CLP Multi: 2.0 >E-CLP Time(m): 10 [1~720:1m]
Range
1~720min Step 1
Default 10 level is risen or dropped.
Set the cold load time. During this set time, the overcurrent pickup
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
177
7.1.13. Directional Controls (67)

The directional Controls provide time protection in the direction of power flow. The directional Controls are necessary for the protection of multiple feeders, when it has the necessity of finding faults in different directions. The directional controls are composed of phase, gound, sensitive ground, and negative sequence overcurrent elements. If directional controls are selected, it will determine whether current flow in each phase is in forward or reverse direction, as determined by the connection of the phase CTs, selected Maximum Torque Angle (MTA), voltage and current phasors. To increase security of all directional controls, add one power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect operation. The directional controls have each three settings. The directional controls settings can be different in the Primary and Alternate settings.
7.1.13.1. Phase Directional Controls (67P)

Normal voltage V1 provides phase pole direction in Power line system. Phase direction is determined by comparing normal voltage(V1) and normal current(I1). If an angle between normal voltage(V1) and normal current(I1) is within 90, the direction is forward otherwise it is backward(reverse direction). Maximum torque angle is set between 0 and 359. Max torque initial angle is set for lags Normal voltage V1 for60.( Initial set value of Max Torque angle shall be set 60 lagging angle. If Polarized voltage becomes lower than the Minimum polarized Voltage, phase direction control is lost and phase over current is not detected. On the other hand, if phase direction control is set for NONE, regardless of phase direction, phase over current is detected. Phase direction control type can be set in order to detect phase over current. Depending on control type, over current can be detected in Forward direction or reverse direction or regardless of direction. Following Figure 7-9. Phasor Diagram for I1 Directional Polarization shows normal current (I1) direction polarity phasor diagram in complex plane.
178
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Figure 7-9. Phasor Diagram for I1 Directional Polarization The phase direction control in the following four settings should be enabled. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / PHASE / Type
[PHASE] >Type: M.T.A(V1): [NONE/FOR/REV]
Range
FOR 60
NONE, FORWARE, REVERSE Step ~
Default NONE Set phase direction type.
NONE : Regardless of phase direction, over current is detected by normal current(I1). FOR : Over current is detected when forward phase direction. REV : Over current is detected when reverse phase direction. RIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / PHASE / M.T.A(V1)
[PHASE] Type: >M.T.A(V1): [0~359:1Lag]
Range
FOR 60
0 ~ 359 degree Step 1 degree
Default 60
Enter the Maximum Torque Angle. The Maximum Torque Angle setting determines the range of current direction for the polarizing voltage. For typical distribution systems, the faulted angle of the phase will be approximately 3060 degree.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
179
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / PHASE / M.P.V

[PHASE] M.T.A(V1): 60 >M.P.V: 30 [0(OFF),10~80:1%]
Range
0(OFF), 10~80% Step 1%
Default 30
To check Phase disconnect direction, it shall set Minimum Polarizing Voltage, V1). It is available to check the direction when a votage shall be more than this set value. Otherwise, checking is blocked. In case of setting 0(OFF), direction is not checked.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / PHASE / BLOCK OC

[PHASE] M.P.V: >BLOCK OC: [NO/YES]
Range
30 NO
NO, YES Step ~
Default NO minimum polarizing voltage set. NO : Trip on over current element.
Select whether to trip when polarizing voltage is dropped below
YES : No trip on over current element.
7.1.13.2. Ground Directional Controls (67G)

Zero phase voltage 3V0 provides ground control direction in power system. Ground direction is determined by comparing zero phase voltage (3V0) and zero phase current(I0). If an angle from zero phase voltage to zero phase current is within 90 based on Maximum Torque Angle, it is forward direction, otherwise, reverse direction. Maximum Torque Angle is between 0 and 359 . Initial set value of max torque angle is set for 60 lagging compared with Zero sequence voltage(-V0). Polarized voltage drops Min. polarized voltage, ground direction control is cancelled and ground over current is not detected. On the other hand, if ground direction control is set for NONE, ground over current is detected regardless of direction. Ground direction control type is set to detect ground over current. Depending on control type, over current is detected or is not detected. Following figure shows phasor graph of zero phase current direction polarity in complex plane.
180
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Figure 7-10. Phasor Graph for Ig Directional Polarization The ground direction control in the following four settings should be enabled. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / GROUND / Type
[GROUND] >Type: M.T.A(-V0): [NONE/FOR/REV]
Range
FOR 60
Default NONE Set Ground direction type.
NONE : Regardless of ground direction, over current is detected by normal current(Ig). FOR : Over current is detected when forward ground direction. REV : Over current is detected when reverse ground direction. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / GROUND / M.T.A
[GROUND] Type: >M.T.A(-V0): [0~359:1Lag]
Range
FOR 60
Default 60
Enter the maximum torque angle, The maximum torque angle setting determines the range of current direction for the polarized voltage. For system with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals, the ground maximum torque angle will be approximately 60degree. For system with solidly grounded or resistively grounded the maximum torque angle will be approximately 90 degree.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
181
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / GROUND / M.P.V

[GROUND] M.T.A(-V0): 60 >M.P.V: 30 [0(OFF),10~80:1%]
Range
0(OFF), 10 ~ 80% Step 1%
Default 30
Set Minimum Polarizing Voltage to check ground fault direction. Voltage shall be higher than this set value to check the direction. Otherwise, direction check will be blocked. In case of setting 0(OFF), direction checking is disabled.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / GROUND / BLOCK OC

[GROUND] M.P.V: >BLOCK OC: [NO/YES]
Range
30 NO
NO, YES Step ~
YES : No trip on over current element. . NOTE : The SEF direction control process a very similar method to the ground directional controls. But, the default value of SEF directional element Type is Npne, and default value of M.T.A(-V0) is 90 .
7.1.13.3. Negative Sequence Directional Controls (67(46))

Negative Sequence voltage V2 provides negative sequence pole direction in power system. Negative sequence direction is determined by comparing negative sequence voltage(V2) and negative current(I2). If an angle from negative sequence voltage(V2) to negative sequence current(I2) is within 90 based on Maximum Torque Angle, it is forward direction, otherwise, reverse direction. Maximum Torque Angle is between 0 and 359. Maximum Torque Angle initial set value leads from negative sequence voltage(V2) for 60. If polarizing voltage drops minimum polarizing voltage, negative sequence direction control is cancelled and over current is not detected. On the other hand, if negative sequence direction control type is set for NONE, over current is detected regardless of direction. Set negative sequence direction control type to detect negative sequence overcurrent. Depending on control type, overcurrent is detected in forward or reverse or both direction. Following figure shows phasor graph of negative sequence current(I2) direction polarity.
182
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Figure 7-11. Phasor Diagram for I2 Directional Polarization The negative sequence directional controls in the following four settings should be enabled. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ / Type
[NEG SEQ] >Type: NONE M.T.A(-V2): 60 [NONE/FOR/REV]
Range
Default NONE
Set Negative sequence direction type. NONE : Regardless of negative sequence direction, over current is detected by normal current(I2). FOR : Over current is detected when forward negative sequence direction. REV : Over current is detected when reverse negative sequence direction.
ro Ze ue rq To ne Li R FO W O R D
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
R EV ER SE
183
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ / M.T.A

[NEG SEQ] Type: NONE >M.T.A(-V2): 60 [0~359:1Lag]
Range
Default 60
In case that negative sequence over current is occurred, Minimum Torque Angle of negative sequence current(I2) against zero phase voltage(V2) is set
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ / M.P.V

[NEG SEQ] M.T.A(-V0): 60 >M.P.V: 30 [0(OFF),10~80:1%]
Range
0(OFF), 10 ~ 80% Step 1%
Default 30
Set Minimum Polarizing Voltage to check Negative Sequence. Voltage shall be higher than this set value to check the direction. Otherwise, direction check will be blocked. In case of setting 0(OFF), direction checking is disabled.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ / BLOCK OC

[NEG SEQ] M.P.V: >BLOCK OC: [NO/YES]
Range
30 NO
NO, YES Step ~
YES : No trip on over current element.
184
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7.1.14. Undervoltage (27)

In case that nominal voltage is kept below a certain voltage for a certain time, two undervoltage elements make a trip operation. Undervoltage element is set in Primary or Alternate setting group. It is available to select a number of phase to be checked for undervoltage function. The undervoltage element can be used to supervise that torque control other overcurrent protective elements. When the circuit breaker is closed by a local/remote controls, the undervoltage element is disabled from detecting for the cold load pickup during periods. To increase security, all undervoltage elements add two power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect operation.
Undervoltage 1 Setup
The undervoltage 1 should be enabled to the following settings. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / UV1 Func
[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] >UV1 Func: OFF >UV1 Pickup: 0.80 [OFF/TR/AL/TR&AL]
Range
OFF, TR, AL, TR&AL Step ~
Default OFF
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TR condition, the device trips. If function = AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a AR condition, the device gives the alarm. If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition, the device trips and gives the alarm.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / UV1 Pickup

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] >UV1 Func: OFF >UV1 Pickup: 0.80 [0.10~1.40:0.01]
Range
0.10 ~ 1.40 Step 0.01pu
Default 0.80
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the secondary nominal voltage. For example, if the secondary nominal voltage is 100V, and an alarm is required whenever the voltage goes below 80V, enter(80/100) = 0.80 VT for the pickup.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
185
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / UV1 Delay

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] UV1 Pickup: 0.80 >UV1 Delay: 5.00 [0.00~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 5.00 Select the definite time delay.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / Voltage Type

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] >OV1 Delay: 5.00 >Voltage Type: 1P [1P/2P/3P]
Range
1P, 2P, 3P Step ~
Default 1P voltage1.
Set a number of phase to be detected for Undervoltage1 and Over1P : More than 1 phase is detected with more than pickup voltage. 2P : More than 2 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage. 3P : More than 3 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage. . NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overvoltage1 element.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / Min. V

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] >Voltage Type: 1P >Min. V: 0.10 [0.10~1.40:0.01pu]
Range
0.10 ~ 1.40 xVT(secondary nominal voltage) Step 0.01 xVT
Default 0.10
Enter the minimum voltage for the undervoltage and overvoltage. Used to prevent the undervoltage1 element and overvoltage1 element for voltage below this level. Setting to 0.10 xVT will allow a dead line to be considered a trip condition. . NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overvoltage1 element.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / NVCL Func

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] >NVCL Func: OFF NVCL TD: 30 [0FF/ON]
Range
OFF, ON Step -
Default OFF becomes back normal voltage.
Select ON/OFF to make Close operation when the linve voltage
. NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overvoltage1 element.
186
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / NVCL TD

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] >NVCL Func: OFF >NVCL TD: 30 [0~60000:1s]
Range
0 ~ 60000sec Step 1sec
Default 30
Set a delay time for close operation when normal voltage returns. . NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overvoltage1 element.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / NVCL TD

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] >NVCL TD: 30 >NVCL Rst TD: 30 [0~60000:1s]
Range
Default 30
After under/over voltage 1 trip, this setting time later, if line voltage does not come back to normal, NVCL function does not operate. . NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overvoltage1 element.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / UV1 NVCL Lv

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] >UV1 NVCL Lv: 0.95 >OV1 NVCL Lv: 1.05 [0.10~1.40:0.01pu]
Range
Default 0.95
Set the lower bound of normal voltage. . NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overvoltage1 element.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / OV1 NVCL Lv

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] >UV1 NVCL Lv: 0.95 >OV1 NVCL Lv: 1.05 [0.10~1.40:0.01pu]
Range
Default 1.05
Set the upper bound of normal voltage. . NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overvoltage1 element.
Undervoltage 2 Setup
The undervoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the undervoltage 1.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
187
7.1.15. Overvoltage (59)

In case that nominal voltage is kept higher than a certain voltage for a certain time, two overvoltage elements makes a trip operation. Overvoltage element is set in Primary or Alternate setting group. It is available to select a number of phase to be checked for overvoltage function. When the circuit breaker is closed by a local/remote controls, the overvoltage element is disabled from detecting for the cold load pickup during periods. To increase security, all overvoltage elements add two power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect operation.
Overvoltage 1 Setup
The overvoltage 1 should be enabled to the following settings. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / OV1 Func
[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] >OV1 Func: OFF >OV1 Pickup: 1.10 [OFF/TR/AL/TR&AL]
Range
Default OFF
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TR condition, the device trips. If function = AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a AR condition, the device gives the alarm. If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition, the device trips and gives the alarm.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / OV1 Pickup

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] >OV1 Func: OFF >OV1 Pickup: 1.10 [0.10~1.40:0.01pu]
Range
Default 1.10
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the secondary nominal voltage. For example, if the secondary nominal voltage is 100V, and an alarm is required whenever the voltage exceeds 110 V, enter (110/100) = 1.10 VT for the pickup.
188
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / OV1 Delay

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] OV1 Pickup: 1.10 >OV1 Delay: 5.00 [0.00~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
. NOTE ) The closing function seting is applied equally as the under voltage 1 element in case of Overvoltage detect phase number, min. operation voltage and normal voltage reset. Refer to 7.1.14. Undervoltage(27) avout the related setting item.
Overvoltage 2 Setup
The overvoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
189
7.1.16. Underfrequency Load Shedding (81U)

The underfrequency load shedding element is activated to trip when the distribution system frequency drops below a specified frequency pickup for a specified time. The power system frequency is measured from the zero crossing on the VA-N voltage input for Wye connected VTs and VA-B voltage for Delta connected VTs.(If VTs is delta connection( ), VA-B voltage is zero crossing and if wye connection(Y), VA-N voltage zero crossing to measure frequency.) The underfrequency minimum voltage and underfrequency minimum current are used to prevent incorrect operation when the recloser is closed by a local/remote control and the underfrequency load shedding is disabled from tripping for cold load pickup during periods. The underfrequency load shedding element should be enabled to the following settings. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ / UF Pickup
[UNDER/OVER FREQ] >UF Pickup: OFF >UF TD: 2.00 [0(OFF),40.00~65.00]
Range
0(OFF), 40.00 ~ 65.00 Hz Step 0.01 Hz
Default OFF
Enter the level of which the underfrequency element is to pickup. For example, if the system frequency is 50, and load shedding is required at 59.5, enter 59.50 for this setting.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ / UF TD

[UNDER/OVER FREQ] >UF Pickup: OFF >UF TD: 2.00 [0.00~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ / Min. V

[UNDER/OVER FREQ] OF TD: 2.00 >Min.V: 0.10 [0.00~1.25:0.01pu]
Range
0.00 ~ 1.25 xVT Step 0.01 xVT
Default 0.10
Enter the minimum voltage required to allow the underfrequency element and overfrequency to Operate. . NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overfrequency element.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ / Min. I

[UNDER/OVER FREQ] >Min.V: 0.10 >Min.I: 0 [0(OFF),0~630:1A]
Range
0(OFF), 1 ~ 630A Step 1A
Default 0
Enter the minimum value of current required for any phase to allow the underfrequency element and overfrequency to operate. . NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overfrequency element.
190
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ/ NFCL Func

[UNDER/OVER FREQ] >NFCL Func: OFF NFCL TD: 30 [0FF/ON]
Range
OFF, ON Step -
Default OFF back normal voltage.
Select ON/OFF to make Close operation when the frequency becomes
. NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overfrequency element. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ/ NFCL TD
[UNDER/OVER FREQ] >NFCL Func: OFF >NFCL TD: 30 [0~60000:1s]
Range
Default 30
Set a delay time on closing after frequency becomes normal. . NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overfrequency element.
PRIMARY,ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ/ NFCL Rst TD

[UNDER/OVER FREQ] >NFCL TD: 30 >NFCL Rst TD: 30 [0~60000:1s]
Range
Default 30
After under/over frequency trip, this setting time later, if line voltage does not come back to normal, NFCL function does not operate. . NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overfrequency element.
PRIMARY,ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ/ UF NFCLLv

[UNDER/OVER FREQ] >UF NFCL Lv: 59.80 >OF NFCL Lv: 60.20 [40.00~65.00:0.01Hz]
Range
40.00 ~ 65.00Hz Step 0.01Hz
Default 59.80
Set the lower bounder of normal frequency. . NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overfrequency element.
PRIMARY,ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ/ OF NFCLLv

[UNDER/OVER FREQ] >UF NFCL Lv: 59.80 >OF NFCL Lv: 60.20 [40.00~65.00:0.01Hz]
Range
40.00 ~ 65.00Hz 0.01 Hz
Default 60.20 Step Set the upper bounder of normal frequency.
. NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overfrequency element.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
191
7.1.17. Overfrequency Load Shedding (81O)

In case that overfrequency is kept higher than a certain frequency for a certain time, overfrequency element makes a trip operation. Overfrequency element is set in Primary or Alternate setting group. If VTs is delta - connection VA-B is to be zero-crossing and if Y connection, VA-N.is to be zero-crossing. Overfrequency Minimum voltage and minimum current is used to prevent mal-operation when recloser is closed locally or remotely. During inrush current restraint algorithm running, overfrequency load shedding function does not operate. Overfrequency settings are as follows. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ / OF Pickup
[UNDER/OVER FREQ] >OF Pickup: OFF >OF TD: 2.00 [0(OFF),40.00~65.00]
Range
0(OFF), 40.00 ~ 65.00 Hz Step 0.01 Hz
Default OFF
Enter the level of overfrequency elements.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ / OF TD

[UNDER/OVER FREQ] >OF Pickup: OFF >OF TD: 2.00 [0.00~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
. NOTE ) Closing function setting in case of overfrequency min. operating voltage, min. operating current and normal frequency reset is applied same as unerfrequency element. Refer to 7.1.16. Underfrequency Load Shedding(81U) for related setting item.
192
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7.1.18. Time Overcurrent Curves

The ETR300-R is equipped Standard ANSI/IEEE curves, IEC curves, ESB curves , user-defined curves and all 32 non standard recloser curves are available. The operation times and reset times refer to ANSI/IEEE C37.112 and IEC 255-3. The operation times and reset times are defined as follows : ANSI/IEEE Trip Time(Sec) = TD ( ( / (M-1) + ) + TA) IEC Trip Time(Sec) = TD ( ( / (M-1)) + TA) ESB Trip Time(Sec) = TD ( ( / (M-1) + ) + TA) USER-DEFINED Trip Time(Sec) = TD ( ( / (M-1) + ) + TA) Reset Time(Sec) = TD (Rt / (1-M2)) Table 7-3. Curve Factor TD TA , , M Rt NOTE : 1) Time Dial and Time Adder settings of each Time Overcurrent(Fast/Delay) menu are applied to Time dial(TD) and Time adder(TA) respectively. 2) Recloser clearing time curves are used when rated voltage of recloser is 15 or 27, otherwise which added 30(4) are used when it is 38. Time dial Time adder Characteristic constant Multiples of pickup current Reset characteristic constant
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
193
Related Setting Menu Set user curves. 4 user curves are provided(USER CURVE 1~4). 1) USER CURVE 1 PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor a
[USER CURVE 1] >Factor a: 59.5000 Factor b: 2.0200 [0~150.9999:0.0001]
Range
0.0000 ~ 150.9999 Step 0.0001
Default 59.5000 User defined curve factor
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor b

[USER CURVE 1] Factor a: 59.5000 >Factor b: 2.0200 [0~150.9999:0.0001]
Range
0.0000 ~ 150.9999 Step 0.0001
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor r

[USER CURVE 1] Factor b: 2.0200 >Factor r: 1.8000 [0~150.9999:0.0001]
Range
0.0000 ~ 150.9999 Step 0.0001
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor rt

[USER CURVE 1] Factor r: 1.8000 >Factor rt: 59.5000 [0~150.9999:0.0001]
Range
0.0000 ~ 150.9999 Step 0.0001
Default 59.5000 User defined curve factor rt
2) USER CURVE 2, 3, 4 : USER CURVE 2 ~ 4, the same as USER CURVE 1 above
194
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Standard Curve Coefficients Table 7-4. ANSI/IEEE Curves Moderately Inverse Normally Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Short Time Inverse Short Time Very Inverse 0.0107 5.9500 3.985 5.9100 3.56e-3 1.9925 0.020 2.000 2.000 2.000 0.02 2.000 0.0231 0.18 0.095 0.0345 1.95e-2 0.0475 Rt 1.0700 5.9500 3.985 5.9100 0.356 1.992
Table 7-5. IEC Curves Standard Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Long Time Inverse Short Time Inverse 0.1400 13.500 80.000 135.000 0.0500 0.0200 1.000 2.000 1.000 0.0400 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Rt 9.700 13.500 80.000 135.00 0.500
Table 7-6. ESB Curves Standard Inverse Very Inverse Long Time Very Inverse 0.011 3.985 15.94 0.02 1.95 1.95 0.042 0.1084 0.4336 Rt 9.000 3.985 15.94
Table 7-7. User Defined Curves User1 User2 User3 User4 59.5000 59.5000 59.5000 59.5000 2.0200 2.0200 2.0200 2.0200 1.8000 1.8000 1.8000 1.8000 Rt 59.5000 59.5000 59.5000 59.5000
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
195
Table 7-8. Definite Time Curves Definite Time 1sec Definite Time 10sec 0.0 0.0 1.0 10.0 Rt 1.0 10.0
Table 7-9. Non Standard Curves McGraw-Edison recloser curves Phase Old A B C D E K L M N P R T V W Y Z New 101 117 133 116 132 162 107 118 104 115 105 161 137 138 120 134 Old 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8* 9 11 13 14 15 16 18 Ground New 102 135 140 106 114 136 152 113 111 131 141 142 119 112 139 151
Table 7-10. KEPCO Curvers Curves N1, N2, N3, N4
196
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Curves Table 7-11. Curve Characteristics *. Curve time is Clearing Time. *. Operation accuracy is +/-10% or +/-10.
Table 7-12. Curve List No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Curve A(101) B(117) C(133) D(116) E(132) IEC-EI K(162) L(107) M(118) N(104) IEC-NI P(115) R(105) T(161) V(137) IEC-VI W(138) No 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Curve Y(120) Z(134) 1(102) 2(135) 3(140) 4(106) 5(114) 6(136) 7(152) 8(113) 8*(111) 9(131) 11(141) 13(142) 14(119) 15(112) 16(139) No 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Curve 18(151) N1 N2 N3 N4 ANSI-NI ANSI-VI ANSI-EI ES-NI ES-VI USER-1 USER-2 USER-3 USER-4 DEF-1S DEF-10S
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
197
1) ANSI/IEEE Moderately Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800 900 1k
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 8k 9k 10k
3k
4k
5k
6k 6k
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ANSI MODERATELY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
20
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
15.00 13.00 11.00 9.00 7.00
TIME(SECONDS)
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4
5.00 4.00 3.00
2.00
0.3
0.2
1.00
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03
0.05
0.02
0.01 800 900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 7k
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 7-12. ANSI/IEEE Moderately Inverse Curves
198
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7k
2k
2) ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800 900 1k
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 8k 9k 10k
3k
4k
5k
6k 6k
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ANSI NORMALLY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
20
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
15.00 13.00 11.00 9.00 7.00
TIME(SECONDS)
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
5.00 4.00 3.00
2.00
0.2
1.00
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03
0.50
0.02
0.01 800 900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 7k
Figure 7-13. ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7k
2k
199
3) ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800 900 1k
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 8k 9k 10k
3k
4k
5k
6k 6k
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ANSI VERY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
20
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
TIME(SECONDS)
15.00 13.00
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
11.00 9.00 7.00 5.00 4.00 3.00 2.00
0.2
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03
1.00
0.50
0.02
0.01 800 900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 7k
Figure 7-14. ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse Curves
200
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7k
2k
4) ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800 900 1k
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 8k 9k 10k
3k
4k
5k
6k 6k
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ANSI EXTREMELY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
20
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
TIME(SECONDS)
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
15.00 13.00 11.00 9.00 7.00 5.00 4.00 3.00
0.2
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03
2.00
1.00
0.02
0.50
0.01 800 900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 7k
Figure 7-15. ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7k
2k
201
5) ANSI/IEEE Short Time Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800 900 1k
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 8k 9k 10k
6k 6k
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ANSI SHORT TIME INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
20
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
TIME(SECONDS)
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4
15.00 13.00 11.00 9.00 7.00 5.00
0.3
4.00
0.2
3.00
2.00
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04
1.00
0.50
0.03
0.02
0.01 800 900 1k 3k 4k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 5k 2k 7k
Figure 7-16. ANSI/IEEE Short Time Inverse Curves
202
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6) ANSI/IEEE Short Time Very Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800 900 1k
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 8k 9k 10k
3k
4k
5k
6k 6k
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ANSI SHOTR TIME VERY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
20
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
TIME(SECONDS)
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
15.00 13.00 11.00 9.00 7.00 5.00
0.2
4.00 3.00
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03
2.00
1.00
0.50
0.02
0.01 800 900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 7k
Figure 7-17. ANSI/IEEE Short Time Very Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7k
2k
203
7) IEC Standard Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800 900 1k
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 8k 9k 10k
3k
4k
5k
6k 6k
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : IEC STANDARD INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
20
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
1 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
TIME(SECONDS)
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03
0.05
0.02
0.01 800 900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 7k
Figure 7-18. IEC Standard Inverse Curves
204
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7k
2k
8) IEC Very Inverse Curves
100
200
300
500
600
700
800
400
900 1k
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 8k 9k 10k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k 6k
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : IEC VERY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
20
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
TIME(SECONDS)
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
1.00 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
0.2
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05
0.2
0.1
0.04 0.03
0.05
0.02
0.01 4k 800 900 1k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 7k 2k 3k 5k
Figure 7-19. IEC Very Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7k
205
9) IEC Extremely Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800 900 1k
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 8k 9k 10k
3k
4k
5k
6k 6k
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : IEC EXTREMELY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
20
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
TIME(SECONDS)
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
0.2
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03
1.00 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
0.02
0.2 0.1 0.05

0.01 800 900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 7k
Figure 7-20. IEC Extremely Inverse Curves
206
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7k
2k
10) IEC Long Time Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800 900 1k
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 8k 9k 10k
3k
4k
5k
6k 6k
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : IEC LONG TIME VERY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
20
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
1.00 0.8 0. 7 0. 6 0. 5
TIME(SECONDS)
0. 4 0. 3
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5
0.2
0.1
0.4 0.3
0.05
0.2
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03
0.02
0.01 800 900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 7k
Figure 7-21. IEC Long Time Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7k
2k
207
11) IEC Short Time Inverse Curves
100
300
200
400
500
600
700
800 900 1k
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 8k 9k 10k
3k
2k
4k
5k
6k 6k
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : IEC SHORT TIME INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
20
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
TIME(SECONDS)
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
1.00 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4
0.2
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.03
0.02
0.05
0.01 500 700 200 400 600 800 900 1k 4k 2k 3k 5k 100 300 7k
Figure 7-22. IEC Short Time Inverse Curves
208
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7k
12) ESB Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800 900 1k
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 8k 9k 10k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k 6k
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ESB INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
20
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
15.00 13.00 11.00 9.00 7.00
TIME(SECONDS)
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
5.00 4.00 3.00
2.00
0.2
1.00
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03
0.50
0.02
0.01 800 900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 200 300 400 500 700 100 600 7k
Figure 7-23. ESB Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7k
209
13) ESB Very Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800 900 1k
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 8k 9k 10k
3k
4k
5k
6k 6k
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ESB VERY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS 5% 0.01 SECONDS
20
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
TIME(SECONDS)
15.00 13.00 11.00

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5
9.00 7.00 5.00 4.00
0.4
3.00
0.3
2.00
0.2
1.00
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03
0.05
0.02
0.01 800 900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 7k
Figure 7-24. ESB Very Inverse Curves
210
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7k
2k
14) ESB Long Time Very Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800 900 1k
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 8k 9k 10k
3k
4k
5k
6k 6k
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ESB LONG TIME VERY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
20
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
15.00 13.00 11.00 9.00 7.00 5.00
TIME(SECONDS)
4.00 3.00
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5
2.00
1.00
0.4 0.3
0.50
0.2
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03
0.02
0.01 800 900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 7k
Figure 7-25. ESB Long Time Very Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7k
2k
211
15) Definite Time Curves (DEF-1S, DEF-10S)
100
300
200
400
500
600
700
800 900 1k
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 8k 9k 10k
3k
2k
4k
5k
6k 6k
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : D1, D2 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
20
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
D2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
D1
0.2
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03
0.02
0.01 500 700 200 400 600 800 900 1k 4k 2k 3k 5k 100 300 7k
Figure 7-26. Definite Time Curves (D1, D2)
212
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7k
16) KEPCO Curves(N1, N2, N3, N4)
Figure 7-27. KEPRI Curves (N1, N2, N3, N4)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
213
17) Non Standard Curves (A, B, C, D, E)
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800 900 1k
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 8k 9k 10k
3k
4k
5k
6k 6k
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : A, B, C, D, E CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
20
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
TIME(SECONDS)
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
0.2
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05
C B E
D A
0.04 0.03
0.02
0.01 800 900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 7k
Figure 7-28. Non Standard Curves (A, B, C, D, E)
214
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7k
2k
18) Non Standard Curves (K, L, M, N)
Figure 7-29. Non Standard Curves (K, L, M, N)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
215
19) Non Standard Curves (P, R, T, V)
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800 900 1k
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 8k 9k 10k
3k
2k
4k
5k
6k 6k
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : P, R, T, V CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
20
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
TIME(SECONDS)
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
0.2
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03
R P
0.02
0.01 2k 4k 5k 200 400 500 600 700 100 300 800 900 1k 7k
Figure 7-30. Non Standard Curves (P, R, T, V)
216
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
3k
7k
20) Non Standard Curves (W, Y, Z)
100
300
200
400
500
600
700
800 900 1k
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 8k 9k 10k
3k
2k
4k
5k
6k 6k
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : W, Y, Z CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
20
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
TIME(SECONDS)
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5
Z
0.4 0.3
W
0.2
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03
0.02
0.01 500 700 200 400 600 800 900 1k 4k 2k 3k 5k 100 300 7k
Figure 7-31. Non Standard Curves (W, Y, Z)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7k
217
21) Non Standard Curves (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800 900 1k
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 8k 9k 10k
2k
3k
4k
6k 6k
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
20
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
TIME(SECONDS)
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
0.2
5
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03
4 1
0.02
0.01 800 900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 7k
Figure 7-32. Non Standard Curves (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
218
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7k
5k
22) Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)
100
200
300
600
700
500
800
400
900 1k
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 8k 9k 10k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k 6k
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : 6, 7, 8, 8*, 9 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
7
20
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
TIME(SECONDS)
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
0.2
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05
8* 6
0.04 0.03
0.02
0.01 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1k 7k
2k
3k
4k
Figure 7-33. Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
5k
7k
219
23) Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)
Figure 7-34. Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)
220
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
24) Non Standard Curves (F, H, J, KG)
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800 900 1k
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 8k 9k 10k
3k
4k
5k
6k 6k
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : F, H, J, KG CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
20
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
TIME(SECONDS)
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
0.2
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03
J KG
0.02
0.01 800 900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 7k
Figure 7-35. Non Standard Curves (F, H, J, KG)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7k
2k
221
7.1.19. Live Load Block

It is to block reloser closing if the load side is live line. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / LIVE LOAD BLOCK / Function
[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING] >Funcktion: OFF >Live Level: 0.80 [OFF/REC/CLOSE/BOTH]
Range
OFF, REC, CLOSE, BOTH Step ~
Default OFF
Select whether to use Live load block function. OFF : Live load block function does not work. REC : When recloser closing by auto reclosing function, this function works. CLOSE : When local or remote closing, the function works. BOTH :When recloser closing regardless of auto reclosing or remote/local closing, the function works.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / LIVE LOAD BLOCK / Live Level

[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING] >Funcktion: OFF >Live Level: 0.80 [0.10~0.90:0.01pu]
Range
0.10 ~ 0.90 pu Step 0.01 pu
Default 0.80 Set pickup level of live line
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / LIVE LOAD BLOCK / Detect Time

[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING] >Live Level: 0.80 >Detect Time: 5 [0~60000:5ms]
Range
Default 5
Set a time to detect live line in load side. The live line is determined if load side voltage is more than pickup level for this set time.
222
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7.1.20. Hotline Tag

When HOT LINE TAG LEN is ON in the front panel, the over current protection function is operated with the setting value of this menu. Also, Lockout with 1 time trip even the reclosing function is activated. The Hot Line Tag function is composed of phase, gound, sensitive ground, and negative sequence overcurrent elements. The setting items of each element are same with the over current protection element. Refer to PHASE FAST, GROUND FAST, SEF ELEMENT and NEG SEQ FAST menu.
7.1.21. Live Line

ETR300 has Line line detect element. If one phase voltage among three phase maintais over live detec level during a constant time, live line is detected. Live line detection setting item is same as below. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / LIVE LINE / Live Line Lv
[LIVE LINE] >Live Line Lv: 0.30 >Live Line Tm: 4.0 [0.10~0.90:0.01pu]
Range
0.10 ~ 0.90 pu Step 0.01 pu
Default 0.30
Set the live line level and this is set in multiple of previous rating.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / LIVE LINE / Live Line Tm

[LIVE LINE] >Live Line Lv: 0.30 >Live Line Tm: 4.0 [0.0~180.0:0.1s]
Range
0.0 ~18 0.0sec Step 0.1sec
Default 4.0
Set the delay time of live detec element.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
223
7.1.22. Demand Current

ETR300 has Demand detect element.When Demand currnet over the detect level is maintained a constant time during the detect element activation, this element is detected. The detect level and delay time can be set individually per phase, ground and negative sequence element. Demand detect setting items are same as following. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DEMAND/ Function
[DEMAND] >Function: OFF >Interval: 5 [OFF/TR/AL/TR&AL]
Range
Default TRIP
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TR condition, the device trips. If function = AL, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a AR condition, the device gives the alarm. If function = Trip & AL, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition, the device trips and gives the alarm.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DEMAND/ Interval

[DEMAND] >Function: OFF >Interval: 5 [5/10/15/20/30/60m]
Range
5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min Step ~
Default 5 min
Set the time interval to calculate the Demand current.. When current of constant size flows, it is the time that the Demand current reachs the 90% of present current size.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DEMAND/ PHA Pickup

[DEMAND] >PHA Pickup: 600 >PHA T Delay: 10.00 [0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
Range
0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A Step 1A
Default 600
Set the Pickup current of phase Demand element.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DEMAND/ PHA Time Delay

[DEMAND] >PHA Pickup: 600 >PHA T Delay: 10.00 [0.00~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 10.00
Set the detect delay time of phase Demand element.
224
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DEMAND/ GND Pickup

[DEMAND] >GND Pickup: 300 >GND T Delay: 10.00 [0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
Range
0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A Step 1A
Default 300
Set the Pickup current of ground Demand element.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DEMAND/ GND Time Delay

[DEMAND] >GND Pickup: 300 >GND T Delay: 10.00 [0.00~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 10.00
Set the detect delay time of ground Demand element.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DEMAND/ NEQ Pickup

[DEMAND] >NEQ Pickup: 600 >NEQ T Delay: 10.00 [0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
Range
0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A Step 1A
Default 600
Set the Pickup current of negative phase sequence Demand element.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DEMAND/ NEQTime Delay

[DEMAND] >NEQ Pickup: 600 >NEQ T Delay: 10.00 [0.00~600.00:0.01s]
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 10.00
Set the detect delay time of negative phase sequence Demand element.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
225
7.1.23. Other Element

7.1.23.1. Sequence Coordination
When several Reclosers are connected in series to protect distribution systems, ETR300-R contains Sequence Coordination feature which can prevent the simultaneous trip operations in both of Backup and Down-line Reclosers due to phase/ground fault. Sequence Coordination feature is activated only if one out of several Down-line Reclosers connected to one Back-up Recloser detects a fault current. The following rules should be kept to activate Sequence Coordination feature. 1) The same characteristics of fast and delay operations in the total number of the trip operations and identical basic Time Current Curves should be set for all Reclosers connected in series. 2) The identical reclose interval time should be set for all Reclosers in series. 3) To coordinate the protection characteristics, an additional delay operation time (at least 100 ms) should be applied to the Time Current Curve characteristics of Back-up Recloser, not to those of Down-line Reclosers. 4) The reset time of Back-up Recloser should be set longer than any reclose interval time of all Down-line Reclosers. This setting will prevent the reset operation of Back-up Recloser during the reclose operation of Down-lines. The Sequence Coordination feature should be enabled to the following settings. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OTHER ELEMENT / Seq' Coordi'
[ OTHER ELEMENT ] >Seq Coordi: OFF L.O Priority: GND [OFF/ON]
Range
OFF, ON Step ~
Default OFF
Sequence coordination offers the function of preventing unnecessary operation of the backup recloser when two more reclosers are connected in series. If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = ON, the feature is operational.
226
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
As shown in Figure 7-36. Sequence Coordination Operation Block Diagram, if Sequence Coordination feature at Back-up Recloser is enabled and a phase/ground fault occurs in distribution systems, the Back-up Recloser operates timing counter by overcurrent elements. During the count at the Back-up Recloser, if the distribution system is restored to normal by TRIP with Down-line Recloser , the number of the trip operations of Back-up Recloser is increased one step. Back-up Recloser performs trip operation instead of activating Sequence Coordination feature at the last sequence of the full sequence. If Auto Reclose switch is set to one TRIP, Sequence Coordination function can not be operated.
Increase Trip Counter without Trip
Starting Reset Time Counter Close Back Up EVR 1 Open
Down line
EVR 2
Close Lockout Status Open Time
Faulted
Figure 7-36. Sequence Coordination Operation Block Diagram
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
227
7.1.23.2. Others
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OTHER ELEMENT / L.O Priority
[OTHER ELEMENT] Seq Coordi: OFF >L.O Priority: PHA [PHA/GND]
Range
PHA, GND Step ~
Default GND Lockout priority PHA : Phase prior GND : Ground prior
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OTHER ELEMENT / F/I Reset

[OTHER ELEMENT] L.O Priority: PHA >F/I Reset: AUTO [AUTO/MANUAL]
Range
AUTO, MANUAL Step ~
Default AUTO Faulted Indicator reset method
AUTO : Reset shall be performed by pressing [FI RESET] button or shall be performed automatically after High Voltage line becomes normal. MANUAL : It shall be reset by pressing [FI RESET] button. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OTHER ELEMENT / D/T M-Close
[OTHER ELEMENT] F/I Reset: AUTO >D/T M-Close: 0.00 [0.00~600.00:0.01]
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 0.00 Time delay for manual close
228
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7.1.24. Phase Open/Loss

This function determine Phase open/loss in case that one or two phases voltages are more than Off Level and, determine normal in case that all three phases voltages are higher than On Level, the function is released. Under normal condition and does not indicate Phase open/loss. The setting items of Phase Open/Loss detec element are same as below. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ON/OFF LEVEL / On Level
[ON/OFF LEVEL] >On Level: 0.80 >Off Level: 0.50 [0.70~0.85:0.01pu]
Range
0.70 ~ 0.85 pu Step 0.01 pu
Default 0.80 Set normal voltage level.
This setting is applied with the multiple of rated voltage. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ON/OFF LEVEL / Off Level
[ON/OFF LEVEL] >On Level: 0.80 >Off Level: 0.50 [0.30~0.75:0.01pu]
Range
0.30 ~ 0.75 pu Step 0.01 pu
Default 0.50 Set phase open/loss level.
This setting is applied with the multiple of rated voltage. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ON/OFF LEVEL / Time
[ON/OFF LEVEL] >Off Level: 0.50 >Time : 4.0 [0.1~180.0:0.1s]
Range
0.0 ~ 180.0sec Step 0.1sec
Default 4.0 Set delay time of phase open/loss.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
229
7.1.25. Alarm Current

ETR300 occures an Alarm Current event when over the detect level of RMS current maintains a constant time. Alarm Current event is occurred individually per A, B, C, N phase and Negative Sequence. Alarm Current setting items are same as below. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ALARM CURRENT / PHA-Pickup
[OVER CURRENT] >PHA-Pickup: 400 >PHA-Time: 2.0 [0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
Range Default Step
0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A Applicable for lower than Ver. 3.4 of ETR300-R : 400 Applicable for Ver. 3.4 or higher of ETR300-R : OFF 1A
Set the detect current of Alarm Current about phase current.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ALARM CURRENT / PHA-Time

[OVER CURRENT] >PHA-Pickup: 400 >PHA-Time: 2.0 [0.0~180.0:0.1s]
Range
0.0 ~ 180.0 sec Step 0.1sec
Default 2.0
Set the detect time of alarm Current about the phase current.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ALARM CURRENT / GND-Pickup

[OVER CURRENT] >GND-Pickup: 70 >GND-Time: 2.0 [0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
Range Default Step
Set the detect current of Alarm Current about ground current.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ALARM CURRENT / GND-Time

[OVER CURRENT] >GND-Pickup: 70 >GND-Time: 2.0 [0.0~180.0:0.1s]
Range
0.0 ~ 180.0 sec Step 0.1sec
Default 2.0
Set the detect time of Alarm Current about ground current.
230
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ALARM CURRENT / NEG-Pickup

[OVER CURRENT] >NEG-Pickup: 400 >NEG-Time: 2.0 [0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
Range Default Step
Set the detect current of Alarm Current about the negative seq current.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ALARM CURRENT / NEG -Time

[OVER CURRENT] >NEG-Pickup: 400 >NEG -Time: 2.0 [0.0~180.0:0.1s]
Range
0.0 ~ 180.0 sec Step 0.1sec
Default 2.0
Set the detect time of alarm Current about the negative seq current.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
231
7.1.26. Loss of Phase

ETR300-R has a loss of phase element. The element is provided for trip, alarm and control when loss of phase is occurred. Loss of Phase can be turned on and off by Primary and Alternate settings and is an optional element depending on the specification of ETR300-R. If any phase voltage of source side becomes 110% higher than Loss of Phase level and one or two phases voltage keeps lower than Loss of Phase for a certain period, circuit breaker determines Loss of Phase. The loss of phase element in the following four settings should be enabled for loss of phase. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / LOSS OF PHASE / Function
[ LOSS OF PHASE ] >Function: OFF Pickup: 0.30 [OFF/TR/AL/TR&AL]
Range
Default OFF
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TR condition, the device trips. If function = AL, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a AR condition, the device gives the alarm. If function = Trip & AL, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition, the device trips and gives the alarm.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / LOSS OF PHASE / Pickup

[ LOSS OF PHASE ] >Function: OFF >Pickup: 0.30 [0.00~1.25:0.1pu]
Range
0.00 ~ 1.25 xVT Step 0.01 xVT
Default 0.30
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the secondary nominal voltage. For example, if the secondary nominal voltage is 100V, and an alarm is required whenever the voltage goes below 70V, enter(30/100) = 0.30 VT for the pickup.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / LOSS OF PHASE / Time Delay

[LOSS OF PHASE ] Pickup: 0.30 >Time Delay: 20.00 [0.10~100.00:0.01s]
Range
0.10 ~ 100.00 sec Step 0.01 sec
Default 20.00
The time set-up is to delay time for loss of phase trip(or alarm).
232
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
7.2. Select Setbank

ETR300 has 6 Setbank and it can have 6 different settings. Primary setting is default setting which works with forwarding Power flow. Alternate settings is used if it requires of small changes in Primary settings or backward power flow, or because of the users needs. Edit setting is used for quick and convenient setting change. GROUP SETTING / SELECT SETBNAK / PRIMARY
[SELECT SETBANK] >Primary: BANK1 Alternate: BANK2 [BANK1 ~ BANK6]
Range
BANK1 ~ 6 Step ~
Default BANK1
Select a Bank of Primary setting group.
GROUP SETTING / SELECT SETBNAK / ALTERNATE

[SELECT SETBANK] >Primary: BANK1 >Alternate: BANK2 [BANK1 ~ BANK6]
Range
BANK1 ~ 6 Default ~
Default BANK2
Select a bank of Alternate setting group.
GROUP SETTING / SELECT SETBNAK / EDIT

[SELECT SETBANK] >Alternate: BANK2 >Edit: BANK3 [BANK1 ~ BANK6]
Range
BANK1 ~ 6 Default ~
Default BANK3 Select a bank of Edit.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
233
8. EVENT RECORDER
Place the curser on 3.EVENT, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. ETR300-R records all events during the operation, occurred events are recorded separately such as operation event, fault event, system event, set change event, load event and diagnostic event. All events are recorded in order(FIFO). In this menu, all events can be checked and deleted. Also, all events can be checked in interface program. This menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu.
[EVENT] >1.OPERATION 2.FAULT 3.FAULT CYCLE 4.SYSTEM 5.SET CHANGE 6.AVER.LOAD/MIN 7.PEAK.LOAD/HOUR 8.PEAK.LOAD/DAY 9.DIGNOSTIC 10.PQM 11.ALARM CURRENT 12.CLEAR SAVED DATA
8.1. Operation Event

Operation event records max. 256 events. When Recloser operates(OPEN/CLOSE), operation status and control signal(LOCAL/REMOTE) is recorded in operation event. Move to MAIN MENU / EVENT / OPERATION to confirm operation events.
[][] are used to check event. [1/256] is the latest event record.
234
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Trigger Source
STATUS - CLOSE - OPEN - EARTH CLOSE (ECLOSE) - EARTH OPEN (EOPEN) CONTROL - MANUAL: Load break switch mechanical manual operation. - LOCAL: Operation at local - REMOTE: Remote operation.
Trigger Time
Monitor changes of Trigger source status in every 5 msec.
Trigger Capacity
Stores last 256 events.
8.2. Fault Event

Fault event records max 256 events. Fault event records fault occurred time, fault phase, fault current size and each phase fault records can be checked. Move to MAIN MENU / EVENT / FAULT to confirm fault events.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
235
[][] buttons are used to check fault events. Press [ENT] button in fault event screen to check fault current value. And press [ENT] again to return to previous screen. [1/256] is the latest event record.
Fault Event Information(EV)

Information before a fault occurring, is recorded. If control type is SWTYPE and coordinating with other protection circuit breaker such as recloser, reclosing sequence is recorded. SEQUENCE Sequence operation is recoded from one [FAULT]. TARGET Records the fault detect phase and fault direction. 001/256 Shows the latest event in order and records 256 events. FAULT Max. current value is indicated when fault is occurred. Fault detect phase and CURRENT fault current direction is indicated. - F: Forward Fault or None Direction Fault detect - R: Reverse Fault detect
Total Information(TO)
Fault type on each phase(Permanent/Instantaneous), time and max current are recorded. SEQUENCE Record the fault detect phase and fault type.( P: Permanent fault, T: Temporary fault) 001/256 Shows the latest event in order and max.256 events are corded. FAULT Indicates the max. current value and fault detect fault type when fault is occurred. CURRENT
Trigger Source
Taget Element - A: A phase - B: B phase - C: C phase - N: N phase - S: SEF - Q : NEQ Fault detect element - T: TEMPORARY - P: PERMANENT
236
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Detect direction - F: FORWARD - R: REVERSE - Fault Current [A]: A phase, B phase, C phase, N phase, SEF
Trigger Time
Moniters changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.
Trigger Capacity
8.3. Fault Cycle - Summary

Fault wave is recorded up to 32 fault waves. Fault wave information is displayed on LCD. Captured waveform can be checked in interface software. Move to MAIN MENU / EVENT / FAULT CYCLE to confirm fault cycle summary.
[][] is used to check the fault event. [01/32] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source
Fault wave captured time. - PU: Pick up time. - TR: Trip time. - PU&TR: Picku up & Trip time Fault current [A]: A phase, B phase, C phase, N phase Fault Location [km] *. Indicated when Fault Locater function is ON. *. For more details about settings of Fault Locater function, refer to 6.4.7. Fault Locator.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
237
Trigger Time
Moniters changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.
Trigger Capacity
Maximum 32 events are recorded.
Recoder Cycle Length

20 cycles when 128 sampling 40 cycles when 64 sampling 80 cycles when 32 sampling 160 cycles when 16 sampling
8.4. System Event

Maximum 2048 events are recorded. Move to MAIN MENU / EVENT / SYSTEM to confirm system events.
[][] button is used to check the records. [0001/2048] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source
Protection Element 52A Contact Sequence status Front panel control AC supply External control Fail operation External input status System alarm Sleep Mode Gas Status
238
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
. NOTE : Refer to Appendix B. LOGIC BIT Attributes & Description for more details about trigger source.
Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.
Trigger type
Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert)
Storage Capacity
8.5. Set Change Event

Maximum 100 Set change Event can be recorded. Move to MAIN MENU / EVENT / SET CHANGE to confirm set change events.
[][] button is used to check the records. [001/100] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source
Changed set menu - GLOBAL SETTING - PRIMARY SETTING - ALTERNATE SETTING - EDITBANK SETTING Change method - LOCAL: Set change at local - REMOTE: Sec change in remote - PROGRAM: Set change by Interface software.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
239
Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 5msec.
Storage Capacity
8.6. Aver. Load/Min

Average load value is recorded every 15 minutes. Maximum 6144 values, its about 64 days events can be recorded. Move to MAIN MENU / EVENT / AVER. LOAD/MIN to confirm aver. load/min events.
[0001/6144] A: 00000 B: 00000 C: 00000 N: 00000 2008/10/01 00:00
ENT
[0002/6144] A: 00000 B: 00000 C: 00000 N: 00000 2008/10/01 00:00

ENT
[0003/6144] A: 00000 B: 00000 C: 00000 N: 00000 2008/10/01 00:00

ENT
P3: PA: PB: PC:
00000/ 00000/ 00000/ 00000/
00000 00000 00000 00000
P3: PA: PB: PC:
00000/ 00000/ 00000/ 00000/
00000 00000 00000 00000
P3: PA: PB: PC:
00000/ 00000/ 00000/ 00000/
00000 00000 00000 00000
[][] button is used to check the events. To check real active power and reactive power, press [ENT] button. To return back to previous screen, press [ENT] again. [0001/6144] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source
Measured current [A]: A phase, B phase, C phase, N phase Measured active power [kW]: 3 phases, A phase, B phase, C phase Measured reactive power [kVar]: 3phases, A phase, B phase, C phase
Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 15min.
Storage Capacity
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
240
8.7. Peak. Load/Hour

Peak load event is recorded in every hour. Maximum load in every hour, is recorded up to 6144 events, its about 256 days events are recorded. Move to MAIN MENU / EVENT / PEAK. LOAD/HOUR to confirm peak. load/hour events.
[0001/6144] A: 00000 B: 00000 C: 00000 N: 00000 2008/10/01/03

ENT
[0002/6144] A: 00000 B: 00000 C: 00000 N: 00000 2008/10/01/02

ENT
[0003/6144] A: 00000 B: 00000 C: 00000 N: 00000 2008/10/01/01

ENT
P3: PA: PB: PC:
00000/ 00000/ 00000/ 00000/
00000 00000 00000 00000
P3: PA: PB: PC:
00000/ 00000/ 00000/ 00000/
00000 00000 00000 00000
P3: PA: PB: PC:
00000/ 00000/ 00000/ 00000/
00000 00000 00000 00000
[][] button is used to check the events. To check real active power and reactive power, press [ENT] button in Current display screen. To return back to current display screen, press [ENT] again. [0001/6144] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source
Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1hour.
Storage Capacity
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
241
8.8. Peak. Load/Day

Peak load event is recorded in every day. Maximum load in every day, is recorded up to 6144 events, its 6144 days events are recorded. Move to MAIN MENU / EVENT / PEAK. LOAD/DAY to confirm peak. load/day events.
[0001/6144] A: 00000 B: 00000 C: 00000 N: 00000 2008/10/03

ENT
[0002/6144] A: 00000 B: 00000 C: 00000 N: 00000 2008/10/02

ENT
[0003/6144] A: 00000 B: 00000 C: 00000 N: 00000 2008/10/01

ENT
P3: PA: PB: PC:
00000/ 00000/ 00000/ 00000/
00000 00000 00000 00000
P3: PA: PB: PC:
00000/ 00000/ 00000/ 00000/
00000 00000 00000 00000
P3: PA: PB: PC:
00000/ 00000/ 00000/ 00000/
00000 00000 00000 00000
[][] button is used to check the events. To check real active power and reactive power, press [ENT] button in Current display screen. To return back to current display screen, press [ENT] again. [0001/6144] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source
Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1 day.
Storage Capacity
242
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8.9. Diagnostic Event

Diagnostic event is recorded, maximum 512 events. Move to MAIN MENU / EVENT / DIGNOSTIC to confirm diagnosticevents.
[][] button is used to check the events. [001/512] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source
DSP Fail ADC Fail RTC Fail Memory Fail Flash-Rom Fail Circuit voltage Fail Globlal Setting Fail Primary Setting Fail Alternate Setting Fail Event Fail Count Fail DO Fail Close Fail Open Fail . NOTE : Refer to Appendix B. LOGIC BIT Attributes & Description for more details about trigger source.
Trigger Time
Monitors status of Trigger source in every 5msec.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
243
Trigger type
Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert)
Storage Capacity
Stores last 512 events. When Diagnostis Fail is occurred the treatment method is same as following. Table 8-1. Treatment Method when Diagnostis Fail is Occurred No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Item DSP ADC RTC Memory Flash-Rom Circuit voltage Global setting Primary setting Alternate setting Event Count DO signal Close/Open Period Within 200msec 1/4 cycle 1 hour, at booting 1 hour, at booting At Flash-Rom reading and writing, at booting 1/4 cycle At setting change, at booting At setting change, at booting At setting change, at booting At event save and reading At counter writing and reading 50msec At closing and opening Method Change to fault detect block Change to fault detect block Change the date to January 1st, 1970 Restart Restart Change to fault detect block Change the Global setting value to Default value Change the Primary setting value to Default value Change the Alternate setting value Default value Event initialization Counter initialization Output power block Necessary to check in local
8.10. PQM
Power Quality Management(PQM) detect event is recorded up to 512 events. Move to MAIN MENU / EVENT / PQM to confirm peak. PQM events.
[][] button is used to check the event. [001/512] is the latest event record.
244
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Trigger Source
PQM detect element. - Sag(SAG): Instantaneous(INST), Momentary(MOME), Temporary(TEMP), Long Time(LONG) - Swell(SWL): Instantaneous(INST), Momentary(MOME), Temporary(TEMP), Long Time(LONG) - Interruption(INT): Momentary(MOME), Temporary(TEMP), Sustained(LONG) - Voltage Harmonic distortion(VTH) - Current Harmonic distortion(ITH) - Source side Unbalance Voltage(UBV) - Load side Unbalance Voltage(UBL) - Current Unbalance(UBI) - Source side Over Voltage(OVS) - Load side Over Voltage(OVL) - Source side Under Voltage(UVS) - Load side Under Voltage(UVL) - Under Frequency(UNF) PQM detected phase : A phase, B phase, C phase PQM element related measured value. PQM detect time(cycle)
Trigger Time
Monitors status of Trigger source in every 5msec.
Storage Capacity
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
245
8.11. Alarm Current Event

Alarm current event is occurred by MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ PRIMARY or ALTERNATE SETTING/ ALARM CURRENT menu. Max. 512 events of alarm current event can be recorded and indicated. Move to MAIN MENU / EVENT / ALARM CURRENT menu to check the alarm current event.
[][] is used to check the event. [001/512] is the latest recorded event.
Trigger Source
Taget element - A: Phase A Alarm current - B: Phase B Alarm current - C: Phase C Alarm current - N: Phase N Alarm current Current of correspondent phase in case of alarm current event is occurred
Trigger Time
Check the status change of trigger source every 1/4 cycle.
Trigger type
Record the Alarm current event occurrence (HI/ASSERT) or extinction (LO/DEASSERT).
Trigger Capacity
Max. 512 events are saved.
246
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8.12. Clear Saved Data

Move to EVENT / CLEAR SAVED DATA to clear saved data. EVENT / CLEAR SAVED DATA
[CLEAR SAVED DATA] >1.OPERATION 2.FAULT 3.FAULT WAVE 4.SYSTEM 5.SET CHANGE 6.LOAD PROFILE 7.DIGNOSTIC 8.PQM 9.PQM WAVE 10.ALARM CURRENT 11.ABOVE ALL
Clear Saved Data

Select an item to delete and press [ENT] button. If deleting is completed, EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS message is displayed.
11. ABOVE ALL

1 ~ 10 items are all deleted.
[EVENT CLEAR] EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
247
9. MAINTENANCE
Place the curser on MAINTENANCE in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. This menu displays Maintenance information. This menu has sub-menu as below and by pressing [ENT] button, move into sub-menu.
[MAINTENANCE] >1.COUNT 2.INTERRUT TIME 3.CONTACT WEAR 4.DATA RESET 5.CCU INFO
9.1. Count
Counter information is displayed, it has sub-menus as below.
[COUNT] >1.CCU 2.OPERATION 3.FAULT 4.PQM 5.COMMUNICATION
9.1.1. CCU Count

Move to MAINTENANCE / COUNT / CCU to confirm CCU(ETR300-R) count. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / CCU
[CCU] RESTART : DIAGNOSTIC :
Restart Count
30 0
ETR300-R restart number is displayed.
Diagnostic Count
ETR300-R Diagnostic Count is displayed.
248
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
9.1.2. Operation Count

Move to MAINTENANCE / COUNT / OPERATION to confirm operation count. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / OPERATION
[OPERATION] COUNT :
Recloser operation counter is displayed.

0
9.1.3. Fault Count

Move to MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT to confirm fault count. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT
[FAULT] F.I TOTAL: TRIP: H/C-LOCKOUT: 1/3 0 0 0
Number of fault is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 3 pages. Use [][] button to move into sub-menu.
FAULT(1/3)
Total number of fault is displayed. Number of TRIP and number of
TOT: A : C : [FAULT] 0 SEF: 0 B : 0 N : 2/3 0 0 0
Lockout are displayed.
FAULT-P(2/3)
Total number of PERMANENT fault and number of fault per phase
TOT: A : C : [FAULT] 0 SEF: 0 B : 0 N : 3/3 0 0 0
are displayed.
FAULT-T(3/3)
Total number of TEMPORARY fault and number of fault per phase are displayed.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
249
9.1.4. PQM Count

This menu displays PQM related counter information, it has sub-menu as below.
[PQM COUNT] >1.INTERRUT 2.SAG 3.SWELL 4.HARMONICS 5.CURR UNBALANCE 6.VOLT UNBALANCE 7.UNDER VOLTAGE 8.OVER VOLTAGE 9.UNDER FREQUNCY
9.1.4.1. INTERRUPT
Move to MAINTENANCE / PQM / INTERRUPT to confirm interrup count. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / INTERRUPT
[INTERRUPT] 1/2 TOTAL: 0 A : 0 B : 0 C : 0
Number of Interruption is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2 pages and use [][] button to move into sub-menu.
INTERRUPT(1/2)
Total number of Interruption and total number of interruption per
[INTERRUPT] 2/2 MOMENTARY : 0 TEMPORARY : 0 SUSTAINED : 0
phase are displayed.
INTERRUPT(2/2)
Number of fault per type is displayed on Interruption.
9.1.4.2. Sag
Move to MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SAG to confirm sag count. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SAG
[SAG] TOTAL: 0 B : 0 1/2 0 0
Number of Sag is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2 pages and use [][] buttons to move into sub-menu.
A : C :
SAG(1/2)
Total number of Sag occurred and total number of Sag per phase are displayed.
SAG(2/2)
Number of Sag per type is displayed.
250
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
9.1.4.3. Swell
Move to MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SWELL to confirm swell count. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SWELL Number of Swell occurred is displayed. This COUNT menu consists of 2 pages and use [][] button to move into sub-menu.
SWELL(1/2)
Total number of Swell and number of Swell per phase are displayed.
SWELL(2/2)
Number of Swell per type is displayed.
9.1.4.4. Harmonics
Move to MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / HARMONIC to confirm sag count. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / HARMONIC
[VTHD] TOTAL: 0 B : 0 1/2 0 0
Number of Harmonic distortion is displayed. The COUNT menu consists 2 pages and use [][] buttons to move into sub-menu.
A : C :
VTHD(1/2)
Total number of Voltage Harmonic distortion and number of voltage
A : C : [ITHD] TOTAL: 0 B : 0 2/2 0 0
harmonic distortion per phase are displayed.
ITHD(2/2)
Total number of current harmonic distortion and number of current harmonic distortion per phase are displayed.
9.1.4.5. Current Unbalance

Move to MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / CURRENT UNBALANCE to confirm current unbalance count. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / CURRENT UNBALANCE
[CURRENT UNBALANCE] COUNT : 0
Number of Current Unbalance occurred is displayed.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
251
9.1.4.6. Voltage Unbalance

Move to MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / VOLTAGE UNBALANCE to confirm voltage unbalance count. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / VOLTAGE UNBALANCE
[VOLTAGE UNBALANCE] SOURCE SIDE : 0 LOAD SIDE : 0
Number of voltage unbalance occurred is displayed.
SOURSE SIDE
Number of voltage unbalance at source side is displayed.
LOAD SIDE
Number of voltage unbalance at load side is displayed.
9.1.4.7. Under Voltage

Move to MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE to confirm under voltage count. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE
[VS-UNDER VOLT] 1/2 dddddddTOTAL : 0 A : 0 B : 0 C : 0
Number of under-voltage is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2 pages and use [][] button to move into sub-menu.
VS-UNDER VOLT(1/2)
[VL-UNDER VOLT] 2/2 dddddddTOTAL : 0 A : 0 B : 0 C : 0
Total number of undervoltage at source side and number of undervoltage per phase are displayed.
VL-UNDER VOLT (2/2)

Total number of undervoltage at load side and number of undervoltage at load side per phase are displayed.
252
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
9.1.4.8. Over Voltage

Move to MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE to confirm over voltage count. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE
[VS-OVER VOLT] 1/2 dddddddTOTAL : 0 A : 0 B : 0 C : 0
Number of over-voltage is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2 pages and use [][] button to move into sub-menu.
VS-OVER VOLT(1/2)
[VL-OVER VOLT] 2/2 dddddddTOTAL : 0 A : 0 B : 0 C : 0
Total number of overvoltage at source side and number of undervoltage per phase are displayed.
VL-OVER VOLT (2/2)

Total number of overvoltage at load side and number of overvoltage at load side per phase are displayed.
9.1.4.9. Under Frequency

Move to MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / Under Frequency to confirm under frequency count. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER FRQUENCY
[UNDER FREQUENCY] COUNT : 0
Number of underfrequency is displayed.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
253
9.1.5. Communication Count

Move to MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT to confirm fault count. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / COMMUNICATION
[COMM-S1] Rx Message: Tx Message: Unsol Tx : 1/6 0 0 0
Indicates the counter information of DNP3.0 protocol. This COUNT menu consists 6 pages. Use [][] button to move into sub-menu.
COMM-S1(1/6)
Rx Message: Indicates the total number of received message of
[COMM-S1] Rx CRC Err: Tx RETRY : SBO TO : 2/6 0 0 0
DNP3.0 Slave1. Tx Message: Indicates the total number of transferred message of DNP3.0 Slave1. Unsol Tx: Indicates the total number of transferred Unsol message
[COMM-S1] D Conf TO : A Conf TO :
3/6 0 0
of DNP3.0 Slave 1.
COMM-S1(2/6)
Rx CRC Err: Indicates the total number of CRC error message of
[COMM-S2] Rx Message: Tx Message: Unsol Tx : 4/6 0 0 0
DNP3.0 Slave 1. Tx Message: Indicates the total number of resend messange of DNP3.0 Slave1. SBO TO: Indicates the SBO Time-out number of DNP3.0 Slave 1.
[COMM-S2] Rx CRC Err: Tx RETRY : SBO TO :
5/6 0 0 0
COMM-S1(3/6)
D Conf TO: Indicates the Data Link confirm Time-out number of DNP3.0 Slave1. A Conf TO: Indicates the Application Link Confirm Time-out number of DNP3.0 Slave1.
[COMM-S3] D Conf TO : A Conf TO :
6/6 0 0
COMM-S2(4~6/6)
Indicates the communication counter of DNP3.0 Slave2. The composition counter is same as DNP3.0 Slave 1.
254
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
9.2. Interrupt Time

Move to MAINTENANCE / INTERRUPT TIME to confirm interrupt time. MAINTENANCE / INTERRUPT TIME Accumulated interrupt time is displayed. This COUNT menu consists
[INTERRUP TIME] 1/2 TOTAL: 0 A : 0 B : 0 C : 0 N : 0
2 pages and use [][] button to move into sub-menu.
INTERRUPT TIME(1/2)
[INTERRUP MOMENTARY TEMPORARY SUSTAINED TIME] 2/2 : 0 : 0 : 0
Total accumulated time and accumulated time per phase are displayed. Time unit is Cycle.
INTERRUPT TIME(2/2)
Accumulated time per interrupt type is displayed, time unit is cycle.
9.3. Contact Wear

Move to MAINTENANCE / CONTACT WEAR to confirm contact wear. MAINTENANCE / CONTACT WEAR
[CONTACT WEAR-%] A : 100.00 B : 100.00 C : 100.00
Displayes recloser contact wear in percentage.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
255
9.4. DATA RESET

Move to MAINTENANCE / DATA RESET. This menu resets COUNT and Maintenance data. MAINTENACE / DATA RESET
[DATA RESET] >1.CCU COUNT 2.OPERATION COUNT 3.FAULT COUNT 4.PQM COUNT 5.COM COUNT 6.COUNT ALL 7.INTERRUPT TIME 8.CONTACT WEAR 9.ENERGY 10.MAX DEMAND 11.PEAK CURRENT 12.COMM BUFF 13.ABOVE ALL
Saved data reset

Select an item to delete and press[ENT] button. If deleting is completed, EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS message is displayed.
*. NOTE :
1) OPERATION COUNT is reset by a set value in MAIN MENU/ GLOBLA SETTING/ MONITERING/ OPERATION COUNT. 2) CONTACT WEAR is reset by a set value in MAIN MENU/ GLOBLA SETTING/ MONITERING/ CONTACT WEAR. 3) Except OPERATION COUNT and CONTACT WEAR, all data is reset for 0.
[EVENT CLEAR] EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS
11. ABOVE ALL

1 ~ 10 item data are all reset.
9.5. CCU Information

Move to MAINTENANCE / CCU INFO to confirm ccu information. MAINTENANCE / CCU INFO
TYPE:ETR300-R03 01:00000001 00000004 02:7d090161 02873f1f 03:0000b7ff
Present ETR300-R information is displayed. CCU information screen consists of 2 screen, first screen shows firmware option, second screen shows firmware version. Screen is changed by [UP] [DOWN] key.
MPU Ver: DSP Ver: CPU Ver:
1.5 3.10 1.01
256
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
10. TIME
Place the curser on TIME in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. TIME
[CURRENT TIME] 2006/11/05 21:02:38 PRESS <ENT> TO SET
Set present date and time. 1) Press [ENT] button to select and change a setting. 2) To change a number, use [][] button and to move next item, press [ENT] button. 3) To save all changed setting, press [ENT].
[SETTING TIME] 2006/11/05 21:02:38 USE [UP/DOWN/ENTER] PRESS <FUNC> : ABORT
[SAVE TIME] 2006/11/06 15;01:50 PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
257
11. STATUS
Place the curser on STATUS in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. This menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu.
[STATUS] >1.RECLOSER 2.INPUT PORTS 3.OUTPUT PORTS
11.1. Recloser
You can confirm in MAIN MENU / STATUS / RECLOSER STATUS/ RECLOSER
[RECLOSER] >RECLOSER :TROUBLE >PANEL LOCK : UNLOCK >CONTROL : LOCAL >RECLOSE :DISABLE >PHA-PROTECT:DISABLE >GND-PROTECT:DISABLE >LOCKOUT :LOCKOUT >POWER : ON >BATTERY : NORMAL >BATCHRGER : NORMAL >DOOR : CLOSE >DNP ADDRESS: 1 >MASTER ADDR: 65534 >HANDLE LOCK: OCKOUT >GAS : NORMAL
Present recloser and ETR300-R status are displayed. Use [] [] button to check all items.
RECLOSER
Displays Circuit Breaker status. OPEN, CLOSE, TROUBLE(Device in Trouble status)
PANEL LOCK
Displays panel lock status. LOCK, UNLOCK
CONTROL
Operation control select is displayed. REMOTE, LOCAL, TROUBLE(Device in Trouble status)
RECLOSE
Display whether to use reclosing function. DISABLE, ENABLE
PHA-PROTECT
Phase protection function status is displayed. DISABLE, ENABLE
258
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
STATUS/ RECLOSER
GND-PROTECT
Ground protection function status is displayed. DISABLE, ENABLE
LOCKOUT
Section operation status is displayed. RESET, RUNNING, LOCKOUT
POWER
External power supply status is displayed. ON, OFF
BATTERY
Battery status is displayed. NORMAL, FAIL
BAT CHARGER
Battery charger status is displayed. NORMAL, FAIL
DOOR
Door status is displayed. OPEN, CLOSE
DNP ADDRESS
ETR300-R DNP set address is displayed(0~65535).
MASTER ADDR
DNP Host initial address(0~65534:65535 is used for Broadcast)
GAS
Circuit breaker gas pressure status is displayed. NORMAL, LOW
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
259
11.2. Input Ports

You can confirm in MAIN MENU / STATUS / INPUT PORTS STATUS/ INPUT PORTS
IN IN IN IN IN IN [INPUT PORTS] 101 :LO/DEASSERT 102 :LO/DEASSERT 103 :LO/DEASSERT 104 :LO/DEASSERT 105 :LO/DEASSERT 312 : HI/ASSERT
Displays 28 input terminal(IN101 ~ IN108, IN201 ~ IN208 and IN301 ~ IN312) status. IN301 ~ IN312 are the status of input ports in External I/O Unit ETIO10. Depending on input signal, HI/ASSERT or LO/DEASSERT is displayed. [] [] button is used to check all input terminal status. NOTE IN301 ~ IN312 shall be Ver 4.0 or higher of ETR300-R to be indicated. If the external I/O unit ETIO10 is not installed or EX-IO? setting is set with NO in GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / H/W OPTION menu, LO/DEASSERT is displayed in IN301 ~ IN312.
260
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
11.3. Output Ports

You can confirm in MAIN MENU / STATUS / OUTPUT PORTS STATUS/ OUTPUT PORTS
[OUTPUT PORTS] OUT 101:LO/DEASSERT OUT 102:LO/DEASSERT OUT 103:LO/DEASSERT OUT 104:LO/DEASSERT OUT 105:LO/DEASSERT OUT 308: HI/ASSERT
Displays 24 output terminal(OUT101 ~ OUT108, OUT201 ~ OUT208 and OUT301 ~ OUT308) status. OUT301 ~ OUT308 are the status of output ports in External I/O Unit ETIO10. Depending on output signal, HI/ASSERT or LO/DEASSERT is displayed. [] [] button is used to check all input terminal status. NOTE IN301 ~ IN312 shall be Ver 4.0 or higher of ETR300-R to be indicated. If the external I/O unit ETIO10 is not installed or EX-IO? setting is set with NO in GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / H/W OPTION menu, LO/DEASSERT is displayed in OUT301 ~ OUT308.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
261
12. METERING
Place the curser on MERING in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. This menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu.
[METERING] >1.CURRENT 2.VOLTAGE 3.FREQUENCY 4.POWER 5.ENERGY 6.DEMAND 7.UNBALANCE 8.HARMONICS 9.TRUE R.M.S 10.TD 11.CCU SEF
12.1. Metering Elements

12.1.1. Current
The following values are contained in the current metering. IA : Displays the measured phase A RMS current and phasor (A, deg) IB : Displays the measured phase B RMS current and phasor (A, deg) IC : Displays the measured phase C RMS current and phasor (A, deg) IN : Displays the measured ground RMS current and phasor (A, deg) SEF: Displays the measured sensitive earth RMS current and phasor (A, deg) I1 : Indicates the measured normal voltage and phasor.(A, deg) I2: Indicates the measured negative phase sequence current and phasor. (A, deg) 3I0: Indicates the zero sequence current and phasor. (A, deg) Peak IA : Displays the measured phase A Peak current (A) Peak IB : Displays the measured phase B Peak current (A) Peak IC : Displays the measured phase C Peak current (A) Peak IN : Displays the measured ground Peak current (A) Peak IQ : Displays the measured NEQ Peak current (A)
262
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
You can confirm in MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT Current per phase and angle per phase are displayed. Use [] [] keys to move to next value.
[CURRENT] IA: 0A 0 IB: 0.00A 0 IC: 0.00A 0
[CURRENT] IN: 0A SEF: 0.00A
0 0
[SEQUENCE I] I1: 0A 0 I2: 0.00A 0 3I0: 0.00A 0
IA: IC: IQ:
[PEAK I] 0A IB: 0A IN: 0A
0A 0A
12.1.2. Voltage
The following values are contained in the voltage metering. VS-PN: Voltage per phase and angle per phase at source side, are displayed(, deg). VS-PP: Phase to phase voltage and angle at source side, are displayed(, deg). VS-SEQ: Forward/Reverse/Zero sequence voltage and angle at source side, are displayed(, deg). VL-PN: Voltage per phase and angle per phase at load side, are displayed (, deg). VL-PP: Phase to phase voltage and angle at load side, are displayed (, deg). VL-SEQ: Forward/Reverse/Zero sequence voltage and angle at load side, are displayed (, deg). You can confirm in MAIN MENU / METERING / VOLTAGE MAIN MENU / METERING / VOLTAGE
[VS-PN] : 0.00 kV : 0.00 kV : 0.00 kV 0 0 0 [VS-PP] AB : 0.00 kV BC : 0.00 kV CA : 0.00 kV 0 0 0 [VS-SEQ] V1 : 0.00 kV V2 : 0.00 kV 3V0: 0.00 kV 0 0 0
A B C
[VL-SEQ] V1 : 0.00 kV V2 : 0.00 kV 3V0: 0.00 kV
0 0 0
[VL-PP] AB : 0.00 kV BC : 0.00 kV CA : 0.00 kV
0 0 0
A B C
[VL-PN] : 0.00 kV : 0.00 kV : 0.00 kV
0 0 0
Voltage and angle per phase are displayed. Use [][] button to check it.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
263
12.1.3. Frequency
The following values are contained in the frequency metering. Source: Metering value of present source side frequency is indicated. Load : Metering value of present load side frequency is indicated.
You can confirm in MAIN NEMU / METERING / FREQUENCY MAIN MENU / METERING / FREQUENCY
[FREQUENCY] Source: 0.00Hz Load : 0.00Hz
Frequency Display
12.1.4. Power
The following values are contained in the power metering. POWER-KW/KVAR/KVA: Per phase, active power/ reactive power/ apparent power are displayed. POWER FACTOR: Power factor per phase is displayed. 3PH POWER: 3phase active power, reactive power, apparent power and power factor are indicated.
You can confirm in MAIN NEMU / METERING / POWER MAIN MENU / METERING / POWER Per phase, power and power factor are displayed. Use [][] button to check the power metering information.
[POWER- KW/KVAR/KVA] A: 0 0 0 B: 0 0 0 C: 0 0 0
[POWER FACTOR] A: 0.0 B: 0.0 C: 0.0
[3PH KVA : KW : KVAR:
POWER] 0 PF: 0.0 0 0
264
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
12.1.5. Energy
The following values are contained in the energy metering. POS W/H(10kWh): Each phase and three phase active power amount of forward direction are indicated. The indicated power is 10kWh per 1 count. POS V/H(10kVar): Each phase and three phase reactive power amount of forward direction are indicated. The indicated power is 10kVar per 1 count. NEG W/H(10kWh): Each phase and three phase active power amount of reverse direction are indicated. The indicated power is 10kWh per 1 count. NEG V/H(10kVar): Each phase and three phase reactive power amount of reverse direction are indicated. The indicated power is 10kVar per 1 count. You can confirm in MAIN NEMU / METERING / ENERGY MAIN MENU / METERING / ENERGY Energy is displayed Use [][] button to check the energy metering
[POS W/H(10kWh)] Pa: 0 Pb: 0 Pc: 0 P3: 0 S:01/01/10 00:00:00
information. The last line S of each page indicates the time that have started the present power amount metering. It means, it is the time that has reset in
[POS V/H(10kVar)] Pa: 0 Pb: 0 Pc: 0 P3: 0 S:01/01/10 00:00:00
0 the power by using the MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/ DATA RESET/ ENERGY menu.
[NEG W/H(10kWh)] Pa: 0 Pb: 0 Pc: 0 P3: 0 S:01/01/10 00:00:00
[NEG V/H(10kVar)] Pa: 0 Pb: 0 Pc: 0 P3: 0 S:01/01/10 00:00:00
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
265
12.1.6. Demand Current and Power

ETR300-R measures and indicates the following Demand current and power items; DEMAND CURRENT: Indicates the measured value of each phase and negative phase sequence Demand current. PHASE A CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase A, Demand current max. value of phase A and the time that have measured the max. value. PHASE B CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase B, Demand current max. value of phase B and the time that have measured the max. value. PHASE C CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase C, Demand current max. value of phase C and the time that have measured the max. value. PHASE N CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase N, Demand current max. value of phase N and the time that have measured the max. value. PHASE I2 CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present negative phase sequence, Demand current max. value of negative phase sequence and the time that have measured the max. value. PHASE A REAL POWER: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase A, Demand active power max. value of phase A and the time that have measured the max. value. PHASE B REAL POWER: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase B, Demand active power max. value of phaseBA and the time that have measured the max. value. PHASE C REAL POWER: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase C, Demand active power max. value of phase C and the time that have measured the max. value. 3P REAL POWER(kW): Indicates the Demand active value of present three-phase, Demand active power max. value of three-phase and the time that have measured the max. value. P-A REACTIVE POWER: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present phase A, Demand active power max. value of phase A and the time that have measured the max. value. P-B REACTIVE POWER: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present phase B, Demand active power max. value of phase B and the time that have measured the max. value. P-C REACTIVE POWER: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present phase C, Demand reactive power max. value of phase C and the time that have measured the max. value. 3P REACTIVE POWER: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present three-phase, Demand reactive power max. value of three-phase and the time that have measured the max. value. . NOTE ) The aboive Max. Demand current and power of each phase and three-phase can be reset by MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/ DATA RESET/ MAX DEMAND menu.
266
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
You can confirm in MAIN MENU / METERING / DEMAND MAIN MENU / METERING / DEMAND
[DEMAND CURRENT] A: 0000 A B: 0000 A C: 0000 A N: 0000 A NEG: 0000 A
[PHASE I2 CURRENT] DEMAND: 0 A MAX : 0 A 01/01/2010 00:00:00
[PHASE A REAL POWER] DEMAND: 0 KW MAX : 0 KW 01/01/2010 00:00:00
[3P REACTIVE POWER] DEMAND: 0 KVar MAX : 0 KVar 01/01/2010 00:00:00
[PHASE A CURRENT] DEMAND: 0 A MAX : 0 A 01/01/2010 00:00:00
[PHASE N CURRENT] DEMAND: 0 A MAX : 0 A 01/01/2010 00:00:00
[PHASE B CURRENT] DEMAND: 0 A MAX : 0 A 01/01/2010 00:00:00
[PHASE C CURRENT] DEMAND: 0 A MAX : 0 A 01/01/2010 00:00:00
[3P REAL POWER (KW)] DEMAND: 0 KW MAX : 0 KW 01/01/2010 00:00:00
[P-A REACTIVE POWER] DEMAND: 0 KVar MAX : 0 KVar 01/01/2010 00:00:00
Demand current and power is indicated. Use [][] key to check the Demand metering information.
12.1.7. Unbalance
The following values are contained in the unbalance metering. SOURCE-VOLT: Voltage unbalance at source side is displayed. LOAD-VOLT: Voltage unbalance at load side is displayed. CURRENT: Current unbalance is displayed.
You can confirm in MAIN MENU / METERING / UNBALANCE MAIN MENU / METERING / UNBALANCE
[UNBALANCE- %] SOURCE-VOLT: 0.00 LOAD-VOLT: 0.00 CURRENT: 0.00
Unbalance are displayed.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
267
12.1.8. Harmonics
You can confirm in MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS
[%V-Harm. THD : 0.0 02H : 0.0 03H : 0.0 A/B/C] 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
[%V-Harm. 04H : 0.0 05H : 0.0 06H : 0.0 A/B/C] 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 [%V-Harm. A/B/C] 31H : 0.0 0.0 0.0
[%I-Harm. 31H] A : 0.0 B : 0.0 C : 0.0 N : 0.0
[%I-Harm. 02H] A : 0.0 B : 0.0 C : 0.0 N : 0.0
[%I-Harm. THD] A : 0.0 B : 0.0 C : 0.0 N : 0.0
Voltage and current harmonic rate are displayed. Use [][] button to check harmonic rate information.
12.1.9. True R.M.S

You can confirm in MAIN NEMU / METERING / TRUE R.M.S MAIN MENU / METERING / TRUE R.M.S
[VOLTAGE-TURE R.M.S] A : 000 V B : 000 V C : 000 V
TRUE R.M.S voltage and current per phase are displayed. Use [][] button to check TURE R.M.S. information.
12.1.10. TD Monitoring
You can confirm in MAIN MENU / METERING / TD MONITORING MAIN MENU / METERING / TD MONITORING
[TD TD1: TD3: TD5: MONITERRING] 00.0 TD2: 00.0 00.0 TD4: 00.0 00.0
TD input value is displayed.
268
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
12.1.11. CCU Reference

You can confirm in MAIN MENU / METERING / CCU REF MAIN MENU / METERING / CCU REF
[CCU Ref] +5V: 4.9 -5V:-4.8 Temp: 37
ETR300-R reference values are displayed.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
269
13. INSTALLATION
13.1. User Interface Door and Power Switch
0 0 3 R T E
-R02
RUN DIAG/ERROR RX / TX AC SUPPLY CHARGER BATTERY REVERSE POWER CLPU ON
METER
FUN 79 RESET 79 CYCLE
EVENT
SET
ESC
79 LOCKOUT 51 FAST/DELAY
AWAKE
ENT
50 INSTANTANEOUS 50 HIGH CURRENT A FAULT
LAMP TEST B FAULT BATT' CHECK TRIP TEST FI RESET C FAULT GROUND SEF PROTECTION ENABLED REMOTE ENABLED 59 OVER GROUND ENABLED ALTERNATE SETTINGS 25 SYNCHRONISM 81 FREQUENCY VA / VR SEF ENABLED ENABLED VB / VS VC / VT RECLOSE ENABLED AUTO RESTORE 1 L 2 L
MANUAL LOCK LOW PRESSURE
27 UNDER
CONTROL LOCKED
HOT LINE TAG
3 L 4 L
CLOSE
OPEN
PORT F
Figure 13-1. User Interface Door and Power Switch User Interface Door User Interface Door has two magnets upper and down(or top and bottom).To open the door, pull the handle. Control Power Switch After opening the User Interface Door, you see 2 Switches. Left side switch is for Battery Power, right side one is for AC Power. Turning on either one of two activates control. AC Power Outlet For user convenience, AC Power Outlet is located on User Interface Door. Fuse is installed for safety from overload. Location of fuse is referred to Figure 13-5. Inner Structure
270
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.2. Vent and Outer Cover
Figure 13-2. Air Vent and Outer Cover Outer Cover It is for blocking the direct ray of light to delay raising temperature inside of Control Cubicle. The gap between control cubicle and cover is 10mm. Air Vent To protect control part from humidity by temperature fluctuation, Vents are on left and right side covered with Outer Cover.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
271
13.3. Dimensions and Mounting Plan
Figure 13-3. Dimensions and Mounting Plan
272
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

ETR300-R has Small size and Large size depending on Recloser Type. Small size is available for EVR-1, EVR-2, Large size is available for EVR3. Large size is able to make User available Space larger, the space unit is referred to Figure 13-6. Mount Accessories Dimensions Standard for EVR1, EVR2 is small size and for EVR3 is large size. EVR1 (Recloser Rated Voltage : 15.5) / EVR2 (27) / EVR3 (38) For installation on a Pole, the lifting hole is indicated. Weight of ETR300-R small size is 85 and large size is 90. ETR300-R should be fixed top and bottom with 16(5/8") Bolt. There is an Exit hole for external cable that can be connected to additional functioning hardware. The diameter of the hole is 22(0.866") and two of Standard Receptacle "MS22" Series can be extended.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
273
13.4. Earth Wiring Diagram
Figure 13-4. Earth Wiring Diagram After installation of Control cubicle, connect the ground. Earth Terminal can connect with core of cable size up to 12(0.470") diameter. Earth cable from Pole Neutral and from ETR300-R Earth Terminal must be connected to the ground.
274
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.5. Inner Structure
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
Figure 13-5. Inner Structure Controller Power NFB (No Fuse Breaker) Left side switch is for Battery and right side one is for 220Vac. Heater Optional Heater is 40W Battery Use 2 of 12Vdc in series. Use () screwdriver for replacement. Fuse TF1 is for circuit protection, refers to (see 13.18. Fuses) Terminal Block Place for AC Power line, there are two ports for user. User Available Space Space for additional hardware connection. Installation and space size refers to Figure 13-6. Mount Accessories Dimensions.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RAIL HOLDER END COVER
RAIL HOLDER
275
13.6. Mount Accessories Dimensions
Figure 13-6. Mount Accessories Dimensions Shows base plate measurements that can be attached in User Available Space. On Base plate, 10/M6 Nut is used to fix the base plate. Available space for height of base plate is from 101.6 (4) to 177.8 (7)
276
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.7. User-Available DC Power

Table 13-1. User-Available DC Power Voltage Rating 24Vdc 15Vdc 12Vdc Voltage Range 2025Vdc 14.015.5Vdc 11.012.5Vdc Maximum Power output 30W Continuous 70W 10second Short 1second Positions Side Panel PTR J (J1, J2-VCC/+) (J3, J4-GND/-)
Standard Voltage : 24Vdc / User can select Voltage Rating 30W DC Power is provided. In case of the necessity of larger than 30W, additional power should be attached. For more details, contact manufacturer. Input of the additional power is referred to Figure 13-7. Terminal Block and Fuses Remove cable coating at the end of cable length of 8mm(0.315). With using () PTR J connector terminal on side panel should be connected to Wire size AWG24 up to 12. To change Voltage ratings, disconnect Jumper Pin in JP3, and connect Jumper Pin to either JPI (24Vdc) or JP2 (15Vdc). Be sure of the voltage rating due to disassembly. When overload, automatically circuit breaks current. In case long-term overload time, there is a fuse on analog circuits to protect circuits from failure.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
277
13.8. Terminal Block and Fuses
Figure 13-7. Terminal Block and Fuses
278
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

Caution for an electric shock due to AC Power loaded in Terminal block. Standard AC Power is 220Vac. Terminal 2, 3 are connected to AC power supply through receptacle. Terminal 4, 5 are earth terminal. Terminal 6,7 can be used for AC power supply branching by user. Terminal 6 is connected with TF1 fuse for protection and Terminal 5 is connected directly to AC power. TF1 fuse(10A) is connected with 220Vac output and 40W heater. User shall be noticed. In AC line connection, blue wired line is for Neutral, white wired line is for Phase wire, green wired line is for the ground. Terminal 14,15,16 are spare terminal for use of recloser 52 control. Terminal 1 is for user use. For more terminal requirement, User-available space is provided.
52 Contact Auxiliary Specs Rating (Resistive load) : 30Vdc 5A / 125Vdc 0.6A / 250Vdc 0.3A
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
279
13.9. ETR300-R Wiring Diagram - CVD Type
Figure 13-8. ETR300-R Wiring Diagram - CVD Type
280
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

Wiring diagram of ETR300-R standard. PTR E has different system wirings depending on User system. In Figure 13-8. ETR300-R Wiring Diagram - CVD Type, PTR E is marked as Earthing System. PTR F, G is Voltage Input Connector. Figure 13-8. ETR300-R Wiring Diagram - CVD Type is CVD (Capacitor Voltage Divider) type VT type is standard and CVD type is for optional. CVD type and VT type are not exchangeable.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
281
13.11. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram

Current IG is connected with Side Panel IN(E07,E08) in Earthing System.
E10 E09 Ise I01 I02 I03 IN Ise I01 I02 I03 IN
SEF(E09,E10) should be connected, so called JUMPER Current IN should be connected with SEF(E09,E10) of Side Panel in. Non Earthing System. IN(E07,E08) should be connected to each other.
Figure 13-9. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram Recloser Phase should match with User system. Refer to Figure 13-11. Phase Rotation CT Phase rotation must be arranged comparing with Voltage Inputs Phase rotation.
282
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
E01
E02
E03
E04
E05
E06
E07
E08
E09
E10
E01
E02
E03
E04
E05
E06
E07
E08
13.12. CVD Wiring Diagram
G08
G06
G07
G04
G05
G02
G03
F06
G01
F04
F05
F02
F03
F01
Figure 13-10. CVD Wiring Diagram CVD (Capacitor Voltage Divider) measures Voltage with using Capacitor installed in each Bushing of Recloser. CVD Type and VT Type are not exchangeable. Current Inputs and Voltage Inputs should be the same phase. If CT Inputs changed Phase rotation, Voltage Inputs phase should be re-arranged. Option CVD 15, 27, 38 Class Load Side CVD of EPR model is optional.
V11
V12
V13
V21
V22
V23
V0
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
283
13.13. Current and Voltage Inputs Phase Rotation
Figure 13-11. Phase Rotation For Metering accuracy, phase rotations of User system and Recloser should be the same. Figure 13-11. Phase Rotation shows the same phase rotation between User System and Recloser. If the phase rotation is not the same in User system and Recloser, correct CT and CVD wiring in side panel to be matched. ETR300-R Recloser phase A is the Bushing the nearest from Trip lever on the side.
284
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.14. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions

Table 13-2. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions Pin A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R S T U V W X Z Function C.T Phase C C.T Phase B C.T Phase A C.T Common(G) CVD Source Phase C CVD Source Phase B CVD Source Phase A Ground(CVD Load side Phase T) Ground(CVD Load side Phase S) CVD Load side Phase R Pressure Sensor Output(controller input) not connected Pressure Sensor Power AGND Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc Cable shield and Ground not connected Recloser Status 69b(locked a connect) Recloser Status Common(24Vdc) Recloser Status 52b(Monitored Trip) Recloser Status 52a(Monitored Close) not connected not connected Pin a b c d e f g h j k m n p r s Function 52 common(Auxiliary) 52b(Auxiliary) 52a(Auxiliary) Close and Trip Coil Common Close and Trip Coil Common Close and Trip Coil Common Close Coil Close Coil Close Coil not connected Trip Coil not connected Trip Coil Trip Coil not connected
Control ETR300-R Receptacle : MS3102 28-21S(Female) Recloser Receptacle : MS3102 28-21P(Male) Control Cable : Shield Cable 8meter(31.5) Cable Shielding layer is connected to Pin R
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
285
Figure 13-12. Control Receptacle Figure 13-12. Control Receptacle shows Female Receptacle installed in Control ETR300-R.
286
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.15. Control Cable Assembling / De-assembling

Do not turn Plug body when Control Cable assembling/de-assembling. For Control Cable assembling, connect with Receptacle check based with Pin Guide position. Following notices are suggested. Turn Plug nut clockwise carefully to prevent Pin winding or out of gearing. Push Plug Body little by little with shaking left and right side into Receptacle; repeat this to complete connection. Turn Plug nut to tighten for Control Cable de-assembling, do the opposite way of Control Cable assembling
Figure 13-13. Recloser Receptacle
Figure 13-14. Control Cable
13.16. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions

Table 13-3. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions Pin A B C Function AC Power Input AC Power Input (Neutral) not connected
Standard Input Voltage of Control ETR300-R is 220Vac. Figure 13-15. Power Receptacle
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
287
13.17. AC Power Cable

TYPE : MS22-2S(Female) Cable Length : 2C-3.5 6meter(236") A PIN Wire Color : White(Phase) B PIN Wire Color : Black(Neutral) C PIN : not connected
13.18. Fuses
Table 13-4. Fuses
Positions Rating / External AC - Power Input 10A Dimensions 0.25"1.25" (6.38531.75) 0.197"0.787" (520) Purpose AC Power outlet and Heater User Available AC Power User-Available DC Power
Terminal Block TF1 Inside Relay Module F1 (Power board)
5A
288
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.19. Battery and Control run time

Table 13-5. Battery Specs Maker Battery Type Nominal Voltage Nominal capacity Dimension Self-discharge Versus Time Service life Time Battery Connector(CN11) Controller run time Recharge Time Global & Yuasa Battery Co., Ltd.(Made in Korea) ES18-12 12V 18 amp-hours 18176167(7.12636.575") 12 month at +20(+68), 5 month at +40(+104) 35 years at +20(+68), 1 years at +50(+122) Molex Connector 3191-2R 30 hours at +20(+68), 15 hours at -25(-13) 60 hours at +20(+68)
Sealed lead - acid Battery Type, use 12Vdc 2 Batteries in series. Harness connector(CN11) from Battery Terminal is connected to battery switch NFB1. In order to store Battery for a long time, turn NFB1 OFF without disconnecting Harness connector.
The self-discharge rate of batteries is approximately 3% per month when batteries are stored at an ambient temperature of +20(+68). The self-discharge rate varies with ambient temperature.
The approximate depth of discharge or remaining capacity of an battery can be empirically determined from
Figure 13-17. Figure 13-16. Battery
Open Circuit Voltage

Turn off NFB1 to disconnect Battery from circuits. Remove Battery Connector CN11(3191-2R) and measure the battery voltage. If the battery voltage is less than 22.5Vdc, the residual capacity is 0%. The voltage can be recharged but requires maintenance.
24Vdc Battery supplies Relay Module and UPS Module through NFB1(Battery Switch). Relay Module supplies through PTR K Connector in Side Panel and UPS Module supplies through CN5 Connector of UPS Module.
Figure 13-17. Open Circuit Voltage
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
289
13.20. Charge Circuit

Charger uses current-control-circuit to prevent sudden-recharge and use voltage-steady-circuit to prevent over-recharge. Charge inspection use 24Vac the same power as Relay Module has. Disconnecting CN11 may cause spark, turn off NFB1(Battery Switch) and NFB2(Ac Power switch) before disconnect CN11. Limit Current measuring should be tested on 10 in series with CD Ammeter. Charge Voltage : 27.5Vdc(0.5V) Charge Current : 300mAdc(50mAdc)
13.21. Battery Change

Battery Mounting consists of two of Bolt M6-15L. Battery Wire consists of M5 Bolt & Nut and is connected to Battery Terminal. Bolt can be replaced using with (+) screwdriver. For Battery wire de-assembling, disconnect Jumper wire first and disconnect CN11 wire(red and black). When CN11 is disconnected first, battery short is considered in case of workers mistake. For Battery wire connection, connect CN11 wire (red and black) first and connect Jumper wire later. Reference Figure 13-16. Battery
290
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.22. Communication Cables

1) Cable CC201: Connect to Computer
Figure 13-18. Cable CC201 (connect to computer) 2) Cable CC202: Connect to Modem, etc. - option
Figure 13-19. Cable CC202 (connect to modem, etc.) 3) Cable CC203: Connect to Modem, etc. - option
Figure 13-20. Cable CC203 (connect to modem, etc.)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
291
13.23. Hardware Block Diagram
1 2 3
RJ45 XPORT
Figure 13-21. Hardware Block Diagram
292
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.24. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits
Figure 13-22. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits CC IGBT UPS Close Coil Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor Uninterruptible Power Supply TC C Trip Coil Capacitor

Recloser Trip and Close Power is charged from C1 in UPS module. C1 is used for Trip power. Trip(Close) runs when IGBT is ON. MC runs and the charged Capacitor transfer the Power to TC(CC), eventually Recloser runs.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
293
13.25. Uninterruptible Power Supply for Trip & Close
Figure 13-23. UPS Module Block Diagram UPS Module charges Capacitor for Trip/Close. Its rated output voltage is 120Vdc. Trip and Close capacitor are charged at the same time but during trip and close, it does not affect to each other. UPS module operates with 24Vac power or spare battery. Transformer in ETR300-R connected with External AC Power generates 120Vac. Sealed lead-acid Type is used for Battery. Battery voltage does not run under 20Vac, runs over 20Vdc.
294
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.26. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram
Figure 13-24. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram Recloser EVR standard wiring diagram CT Protection is automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected. The capacity of CVD is 20, and also automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
295
13.27. Recloser Current Transformer (CT)

Table 13-6. Current Transformer (CT) Description CT Ratio : (1000:1/standard) CT Resistance < 5 Pin A B C D Function C.T Phase C C.T Phase B C.T Phase A C.T Common(G)
13.28. Recloser Capacitor Voltage Divider (CVD)

Table 13-7. Capacitor Voltage Divider (CVD) Description EVR RECLOSER 1) Pin R is connected to Ground. 2) CVD Capacitance : 20 3) For CVD Protection, MOV is connected between Phase and Ground. EPR RECLOSER 1) Pin R is connected to Ground. 2) CVD Capacitance of Source Phase : 26 3) CVD Capacitance of Load side Phase : 20 (Option) 4) For CVD Protection, MOV is connected between Phase and Ground. For voltage measuring, use High Impedance AC Voltmeter(Digital Multimeter) at Output Pin. Voltage Measuring Method 1 measure MOV voltage. (measure a voltage between MOV arms) Voltage Measuring Method 2 Place the capacitor(C2) in parallel with MOV. and measure MOV voltage. Figure 13-25. CVD Wiring Diagram Pin E F G H J K R E F G K R Function CVD Source Phase C CVD Source Phase B CVD Source Phase A CVD Load side Phase T CVD Load side Phase S CVD Load side Phase R Cable shield and Ground CVD Source Phase C CVD Source Phase B CVD Source Phase A CVD Load side Phase R Cable shield and Ground
296
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.29. Recloser Pressure Sensor (Only EVR Type)

13.29.1. TYPE1 Sensor
It is used of Recloser manufactured before JUNE, 2005. Table 13-8. ETR300 Pressure Sensor Description 1) Sensor Power is delivered from Pin P(+12Vdc0.5 %) and N(-) 2) Sensor Output is Pin L(+) and N(-) 3) SF6 Gas is the insulating material and is affected by depending on pressure (density). 4) Figure 13-26. Pressure Changes depending on Temperature and Sensor Output voltage shows pressure changes depending on temperature and Sensor Output voltage depending on pressure. 5) ETR300-R has 0.5bar at 20 Pin L N P Function Pressure Sensor Output Pressure Sensor Power AGND Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc
Figure 13-26. Pressure Changes depending on Temperature and Sensor Output voltage
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
297
13.29.2. TYPE2 Sensor

It is used for Recloser manufactured after JULY, 2005. Table 13-9. ETR300 Pressure Sensor Description 1) Sensor Power is delivered from Pin P(+9~30Vdc) and N(-) 2) Sensor Output is Pin L(+) and N(-) Pin L N P Function Pressure Sensor Output Pressure Sensor Power AGND Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc
5.0 4.5 4.0
Output voltage(Vdc)
3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0.0 -0.8 -0.7 -0.6 -0.5 -0.4 -0.3 -0.2 -0.1 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Pressure (bar)
Figure 13-27. Pressure Changes depending on Sensor Output voltage
298
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
13.30. Recloser 52 contact and 69 contact

Table 13-10. 52 contact and 69 contact Description Pin T U V 69 is b Contact when unlocked. W a b c Function 69b(Monitored locked) Common(52 and 69) 52b(Monitored Trip) 52a(Monitored Close) 52 common(Auxiliary) 52b(Auxiliary) 52a(Auxiliary)
13.31. Recloser Trip and Close Coil

Table 13-11. Trip and Close Coil Description 1) Pin d, e and f are combined as one line. 2) Pin g, h and j are combined and placed as one line 3) Pin m, p and r are combined and placed as one line. 4) Close Coil Resistance : < 5 5) Trip Coil Resistance : < 2 Pin d e f g h j m p r Function Close and Trip Coil Common Close and Trip Coil Common Close and Trip Coil Common Close Coil Close Coil Close Coil Trip Coil Trip Coil Trip Coil
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
299
RECLOSER R CONTROL L ETR300-R
http://w /www.entece ene.co.kr
13.32 2. Recloser Te est Kit

1) RTS 2010 Model l tests ETR300-R by Fau ult Simulation n. 2) RTS 2010 can display d Full Sequence S of f Trip time, Trip current, Interval on n LCD scree en and also can variousl ly test Calibr ration Mode, OCR Mode, External Mode, M Manual l Mode.
Figure 13-2 28. Recloser r Test Kit Standard Ratings s and Featu ures Table 13 3-12. Standard Ratings and a Features s
Classificat tion Current output Voltage output Binary input i Binary output o Time Ac ccuracy Weight Dimensions Control Interface Cab ble Operatin ng Temperatu ure Power in nput Rating R and Ch haracteristic 1.5Arms 3ch (Burden below b 1) 4.5Arms1 1ch (3ch Paral llel) Accuracy ( 0.2% or 0.1m mA) 7Vrms 4c ch (Burden ov ver 1) Accuracy ( 0.2% or 0.00 02V) BI01~02: DC12~150V D or o Dry contact t(User select) BI03~04: DC12~150V(P D Pulse below 1sec) 1 BO01~04 130mA/350V, ON Resis stance (below 35 ) 5ms 6kg(RTS20 010), 1.2kg(ca able), 6kg AL Case 3251502 270 (RTS2010 0) 5212583 348 (AL CAS SE) 2M -20+50 AC180~26 64 @ Select AC220V A AC 90~132 2 @ Select AC C110V Max. 150W W
300
ENHANC CED TECHN NOLOGY
14. MAINTANANCE
14.1. Warning Events
In control panel warning led if is lighted up bellow table refer and inspects. Table 14-1. Warning Events(1/2)
EVENT EVENT TEXT (LCD)
ACFAIL
EXPLANATION
ETR300 ACTION
-
USER RECOMMENDED ACTION

1. Check AC Power NFB 2. Check AC Power fuse 3. Check AC supply, ensure AC connector is securely connected 1. Check AC supply
External power FAIL
CHGBAD
Battery charge circuit FAIL (Value 23V)
2. Check Battery charge Voltage (range DC 27 ~ DC 28V) 3. Replace Analog Module 1. Check AC Power NFB 2. Check AC Power fuse
SYSTEM POWER BATBAD
Battery Discharge (Value 21V) * Related Setting : TD Monitor>TD1-1 NO Battery NOBATT (Value < 19V) * Related Setting : TD Monitor>TD1-2 Power down mode -
3. Check AC supply, ensure AC connector is securely connected 4. Replace Battery charge T.R 1. Check battery NFB 2. Check battery connection
POWER MODE
DOWN
PWDOWN
(Value < 19V and ACFAIL) * Related Setting : TD Monitor>TD1-2
Controller power turn off
No problem 1. Check AC supply 2. Check battery 1.Ensure Control cable is securely connected
GASLOW GAS STATUS * applied only gas insulation type GASHIGH
Gas pressure Low
2. Check Control cable fault 3. Replace Main Processing Module 4. Replace Recloser. 1.Ensure Control cable is securely connected
Gas pressure High
2. Check Control cable fault 3. Replace Relay Module 4. Replace Recloser
SYSTEM RESTART
SYSRST CLDRST GLOBAL, SET GRP or ALT GRP PRI
System restarted Cold Restarted
No problem No problem No problem
SETTING (Refer to CHANGE Event)
Setting Changed
* But somebody modified the setting data.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
301
Table 14-1. Warning Events(2/2)

EVENT EVENT TEXT (LCD)
SELFTERR
EXPLANATION
System error detected
ETR300 ACTION
Detail event Restored default setting by itself Restored default setting by itself All protection and are message are recorded in diagnostic
USER RECOMMENDED ACTION

1.Check the diagnostic event 2.Refer to EVENT TEXT 1. Execute System Restart 2. Execute default setting 3. Replace Main Processing Module 1. Execute System Restart 2. Execute default setting 3. Replace Main Processing Module 1. Execute System Restart 2. Replace DSP Module 1. Execute All Clear Event
while booting
DIGGSET
Global setting error
DIGPSET SELF TEST DIGSPU
Group setting error
DSP board link error
measurement disabled
DIGEVT
Recorded events format error
Cleared events by itself
2. Execute System Restart 3. Replace Main Processing Module 1. Execute default PLC 2. Execute System Restart 3. Replace Main Processing Module 1. Check the close/trip module 2. Check the receptacle pin 3. Replace the hardware or update firmware 1. Check the close/trip module 2. Check the receptacle pin 3. Replace the hardware or update firmware
DIGLOG
PLC data error
Restored default PLC by itself
DIGCL TRIP & CLOSE DIGOP
Close fail
Trip fail
302
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
14.2. Malfunction Events

The following table of events describes the malfunction events available from the control and what they indicate. It also suggest steps to follow to assist in determining why the event was generated. Table 14-2. Malfunction Events
EVENT DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE RECOMMENDED ACTION 1. Connection state of control cable 2. control Box inside CN2 connection state check Control Cable - Table 13-2 - Figure 4-12 - Figure 13-8
- Figure 13-12 - Reference 3. control Box inside CN4 connection state check
OPERATION FAIL
Operation Fail
- Figure 4-10 - Figure 13-8 Reference 1.That control switch point of contact check 2. control Box inside FUSE state check Etc.. - Figure 13-7 Reference 3. Replace Relay Module 4. Replace Recloser 1 Connection state of control cable 2. control Box inside Current connection state
Current measure
check - Table 13-2 - Figure 4-7 - Figure 13-8
Fail of current & voltage measurement Voltage meaasure
Control Cable
- Figure 13-12 Reference 1 Connection state of control cable 2. control Box inside Voltage connection state check - Table 13-2 - Figure 4-8 - Figure 13-8 - Figure 13-12 Reference
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
303
15. PLC function

ETR300-R has PLC(Programmable Logic Control) for user. PLC has Timer, Counter and Event to control input and output. Circuit can be optimized to omit unnecessary timer and aux. relay. During ETR300-R running, in case the circuit needs to be changed, PLC can be used to meet users need. PLC is programmed in ETR300 Interface Software.
Figure 15-1. PLC Screen
304
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

01 ETR300R Manual Control Ver1.47 201304

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

01 ETR300R Manual Control Ver1.47 201304

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Release Date: Apr. 2013 / Manual Revision: 1.

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

Forerunner Distribution & Automation

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

[Apr. 2012] Ver1.40

Release note starts from version 1.40

12. Change the default of Level setting in PQM / INTERRUPT menu.

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

18. Change 7.1.2. Phase (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrents (51P).

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

6. Changed the manual based on ETR300-R firmware V4.00 upgrading.

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

3. DIMENSIONS AND CONSTRUCTION .................................................................... 23 4. SIDE PANELCONSTRUCTION ..................................................................................... 24

5. USER INTERFACE PANEL ........................................................................................ 32

6. GLOBAL SETTING ..................................................................................................... 52

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

7. GROUP SETTING ...................................................................................................... 140

8. EVENT RECORDER ................................................................................................. 234

9. MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................................ 248

10. TIME .......................................................................................................................... 257 11. STATUS ...................................................................................................................... 258

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

11.3. Output Ports................................................................................................................... 261

12. METERING ............................................................................................................... 262

13. INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 270

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

14. MAINTANANCE ...................................................................................................... 301

15. PLC function.............................................................................................................. 304

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

1.2. Summary of Features

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

Control Voltage Input

User available DC power Output - Option

Voltage Transformer Inputs (VT) - Standard

Voltage Transformer Inputs (VT) - Option

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

Current Transformer Inputs (CT)

Control Inputs - Option

Control Output Contacts - Option

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

2.2. Type Withstand Tests

Surge Withstand Capability

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

2.3. Metering Accuracy

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

2.4. Protection Elements

Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence High Current Lockout Protection

Sensitive Earth Definite Time Overcurrent Protection

Cold Load Pickup Blocking

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

Phase Directional Control

Ground/Sensitive Earth Directional Control

Negative Directional Control

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

Under/Over Voltage 1/2 Protection

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R